JP2018164717A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of performing smooth processing while suppressing deterioration in amusement.SOLUTION: In addition to a variation presentation of identification symbols, an expectation presentation image based on a result of a winning/losing determination is displayed in a liquid crystal display device. For a presentation having a prescribed expectation degree with respect to the result of the winning/losing determination, there may be a case where the variation presentation of the identification symbols is not displayed but the expectation presentation image is displayed. Further, there may be also a case where the variation presentation of the identification symbols is not displayed but an information image related to a game machine is displayed. When the variation presentation of the identification symbols is not displayed but the expectation presentation image is displayed, a variation sound related to the variation presentation of the identification symbols is not outputted but when the variation presentation of the identification symbols is not displayed but the information image related to the game machine is displayed, the variation sound related to the variation presentation of the identification symbols is outputted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 164

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit And a second button effect that suggests (see, for example, paragraph 0067 and paragraph 0075 of Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, for example, like the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

JP-A-2015-192817 (in particular, see paragraphs [0067] and [0075])

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image. Display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination, and a predetermined effect. And a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the sound to be output, wherein the display control means has a predetermined expectation for the result of the winning determination. As an effect, a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) for controlling the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the change effect of the identification symbol, and the change of the identification symbol Information display control means (for example, step S905) for controlling the display means to display an information image related to the gaming machine without displaying the output, and the sound output control means is configured to control the specific effect control. When the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the means, the mute device (for example, step S904) that does not output the variation sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the information image display control device generates the variation effect of the identification symbol. When not displayed, it has a fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing is omitted without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. The information image related to the gaming machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is performed, a recovery screen after power interruption, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the information image display control means is cut off when a variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed as an information image related to the gaming machine, and then recovered. The restored image (for example, FIG. 164 (C)) is displayed so as to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the restored image after the power interruption, it is possible to grasp that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed even if the restoration image is displayed and the variation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized. .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external appearance perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the front disassembled perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from diagonally right above. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a hit random number determination table stored in a main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table stored in a main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in a main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the rear view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from back diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from back diagonally upward. It is an example of the rear perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally right above. 3 is an example of a front view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a side view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a plan view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally forward right. 3 is an example of a front view showing a base member of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 4 is an example of a rear view showing a front side plate portion 520 of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a front sectional view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the disassembled cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally forward right. (A) An example of a plan view showing a prize winning solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view of a link arm 630, (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the attacker unit 500 in case the shutter 610 is a 2nd position, (b) It is an example of the top view which similarly shows the special electric accessory 600. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the attacker unit 500 in case the shutter 610 is a 1st position, (b) It is an example of the top view which similarly shows the special electric accessory 600. FIG. It is an example of the top view which shows the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from front diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from front diagonally upward. (A) An example of a plan view showing the housing portion 6001, (b) An example of a perspective view of the housing portion 6001 seen from the upper right front side, and (c) An example of a rear perspective view of the housing portion 6001 seen from the upper right side. It is. (A) An example of a plan view showing the big prize opening solenoid 6003, (b) An example of a perspective view of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 as viewed from the upper right diagonal direction, and (c) An example of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 as seen from the upper right angle. It is an example of a rear perspective view. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the link arm 6004, (b) It is an example of the back perspective view seen from diagonally right upper side which shows the link arm 6004. (A) An example of a plan view showing the restricting member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the restricting member 6005 viewed from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the restricting member 6005 seen from the upper right. is there. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing an assembled configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 in a state where there is no housing portion 6001. It is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembled configuration of a big prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005. FIG. 10 is an example of a rear perspective view showing an assembly configuration of a big prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005. (A) It is an example of the top view which showed assembly | attachment structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing the assembled structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the closed state, (b) a view in which the illustration of the link arm 6004 in (a) is omitted. It is an example. (A) The top view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005 when the driving force transmission part 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 starts a movement from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). (A) The top view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005 when the driving force transmission part 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 continues a movement from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). FIG. 63A is a plan view showing the assembled configuration of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). (A) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being locked by a regulating member 6005. (b) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being unlocked by a regulating member 6005. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from diagonally forward right and upward. It is a part of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from the back diagonally upward. It is a figure which shows the normal electric accessory 460, the 2nd start port switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. FIG. It is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. It is an example of the rear view which looked at the ordinary electric accessory 460 from diagonally right above. An aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line), and an ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is moving from the closed state toward the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (illustrated with a continuous line). An aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a transition state (illustrated by a one-dot chain line), and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in an open state (illustrated by a solid line) FIG. It is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, (A) a view for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is blocked, (B). It is a figure for demonstrating that opening | releasing of the blade member 4620 is permitted. It is an example of the front view of the upper front part 1000 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper front part 1000 in a normal mode. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper front part 1000 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front part 1000 from back diagonally upward. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in an origin position. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration body 1040 is moving toward the downward direction. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front surface accessory 1000 when the movable decoration body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the upper back part 1100 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper back part 1100 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from back diagonally upward. (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in (A). (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back surface 1100 in the normal mode (mode when it is in an origin position) before an operation start, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position after the upper back part 1100 starts operating, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. After the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the movable decorative body 1110 is moved to the paper surface by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. It is a figure which shows an example of an aspect when it operates toward the downward direction (when the covering decoration body 1120 starts operation | movement with respect to the movable decoration body 1110), Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which the covering decoration body 1120 moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration body 1110, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from diagonally upper right forward. It is an example of the rear perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the diagonally upper left. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from diagonally upper right forward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from back diagonally upward. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the aspect when it exists in an origin position, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. FIG. 4 is a view showing an example of a lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 at the time of act | operating to an action | operation limit, Comprising: (A.) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. It is an example of the rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner part 1320 from back diagonally upward. It is an example in the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 are in an origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 started the action | operation from the origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 act | operated further from the position shown in FIG. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 act | operated to the operation limit position. It is a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the back diagonally upward. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 are in an origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 start the action | operation from the origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 act | operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows a mode when all of the 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 act | operated to the operation limit position. The front view of the back unit 176 showing an aspect when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing a mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from back diagonally upward. 10 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which a movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of a display area of a liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which a movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 11 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the motor 1440 for a side accessory is further rotated in the same direction from the state which the movable decoration body 1450 advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. . It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel 1550 from front diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel 1550 from back diagonally upward. (A) An example of the front view of the 2nd middle panel 1550, (B) It is an example of the CC sectional view shown to (A). 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a system timer interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection process by main CPU101. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination process performed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control process by main CPU101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory | storage check process by main CPU101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time frequency subtraction process by main CPU101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process by the main CPU101. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern table setting process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control process by the main CPU101. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing by a sub CPU 201. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing by a sub CPU 201. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command transmission processing by a sub CPU 201. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message setting process performed by a sub CPU 201. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a directory table registration process by a sub CPU 201. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message transmission process performed by a sub CPU 201. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the state transition of a some game state stage. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of scenario pre-setting processing by a sub CPU 201. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a battle attribute 2100 and an effect map 2102. It is a figure which shows an example of the production map used for scenario lottery. It is an example which shows the setting of the temporary fluctuation | variation with respect to each hold | maintenance of 1st hold | maintenance-4th hold with a time sequence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation determination process (secret A stage) repeatedly performed for every predetermined time as a subroutine of production | presentation aspect determination processing. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (secret A stage) which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the starting memory | storage hold | maintained by the 1st suspension-the 4th suspension. It is a figure which shows an example of the starting memory | storage hold | maintained by the 1st suspension-the 4th suspension. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation determination process (secret A stage) following FIG. It is a figure which shows the aspect which blocks three temporary fluctuations. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (secret A stage) following FIG. It is an example of the sequence of temporary fluctuation in the state where the 1st hold-the 3rd hold are the scenario lottery objects. It is an example of the sequence of temporary fluctuation in the state in which the first hold to the fourth hold are the scenario lottery targets. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a modification when it is discriminate | determined in step S326 that there exists the scenario effect in execution. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch effect selection process (high-precision stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the area which performs prefetching production. It is a figure which shows an example which selects the detail of prefetching production. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of the detail of a prefetch effect being a countdown effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a background change control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a background change continuation possibility number determination process. It is an example of the table regarding background change control and a background change scenario. It is a figure which shows the specific example for demonstrating the flow of the background change control process which concerns on this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation scenario determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding change determination process. It is a sequence chart which shows lighting control of a character lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control process of a character lamp effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of control of a full screen effect. It is a screen figure showing an example of a screen display.

[Composition of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the upper front diagonally. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is a direction in a front view. Therefore, for example, “left” written in the right direction in the drawing is the rear view, and therefore “right” in the drawing is “left” in the front view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is written in the left direction of the drawing, “left” on the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left and right directions are defined with the left hand side as the left side and the right hand side as the right side. Furthermore, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, And the substrate unit 19 is provided.

  The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

  The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are disposed on the upper portion of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, production, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for performing, for example, notification with light or production.

  The dish unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper dish 26 and the lower dish 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout outlet 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls to be rented and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout opening 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button” or “push button”. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout outlet 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout outlet 63.

  The launching device 15 is for firing a game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launching device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is disposed on the surface side of the panel body 31. The driving device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the launching device 15, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in accordance with the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), an effect image according to the result of the big hit determination, an effect image during the big hit, and a demonstration effect image. In addition, the number of times of holding the variable display of the identification symbol is included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed at the approximate center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images. However, two liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

  The game board unit 17 is disposed in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll down is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow is formed. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, the passing gate 49, and the back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

  In the transparent panel 172, an opening 1722 is formed at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is disposed. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are implanted therein. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward toward the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 includes two rail-like members (hereinafter referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is disposed inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is disposed in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow area of game balls in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls launched by the launcher 15 are divided into the left and right of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like installed, it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The discharged game balls are distributed to the flow-down area according to the operation amount of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball down to the left region of the center rail 1742 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down to the right region of the center rail 1742 is called “right-handed”. It can be decided by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first start port 5442, the special prize opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed at the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passing gate 49.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed at the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 47 to the upper plate 42 (or from the payout port 48 to the lower plate 44).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a special prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening operation by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later, This is performed when the game state or the small hit game state is entered. In addition, the result of the hit determination performed when a game ball wins at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later is obtained as a special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. This is indicated by the stop display mode.

  The first start port 5442 provides a trigger for hitting determination based on the winning (passing) of the game ball, and triggers the result of the hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first start port 5442 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a predetermined number of game balls are received from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the discharge outlet 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 is made by left-handed.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second start port 440 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is often arranged below the first start port 5442, for example. However, in recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it is difficult to dispose the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first start port 5442. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left portion of the gaming area 20.

  The second start port 440 provides an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and an opportunity for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second start port 440 is provided with a second start port switch 441 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 5), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out 61. Is discharged from the discharge tray 63 to the upper plate 27 (discharged). The second starting port 440 is determined to be difficult to win by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In principle, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed.

  As will be described in detail later, the ordinary electric accessory 460 has a blade member 4620 that can be rotated rightward, a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50), and the power of the start port solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) is provided. When the blade member 4620 is driven by the start opening solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot easily pass. Configured. If the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball wins the second start port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The passing gate 49 provides a trigger for normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 7). When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). Note that the game ball is passed to the passing gate 49 by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first start port 5442, the special prize opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the gaming area 20 is that it is recently required to enlarge the liquid crystal display device 16, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the gaming area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid the enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed at the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a special prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). In the opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the winning game state (big hit gaming state or This is performed when the game is shifted to the small hit game state.

  The general winning ports 53, 54, and 55 are disposed at the lower left portion of the game board unit 17, and the general winning ports 56 are disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 and 56 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a and 56a (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 have three award balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have ten award balls, The number of prize balls is set to 15 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow-down direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win any start port or winning port.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol display unit. A symbol hold display portion 75 and a second special symbol hold display portion 76 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start changing display that alternately turns on and off when a predetermined change display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a win, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol hold display section 72 displays the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol fluctuation display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol hold display unit 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol fluctuating display is held by a combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 and the 2nd special symbol display part 74 display the result (judgment determination) result with respect to a special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of determination (winning determination).

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 comprises the display LED group 73a which consists of 8 LED. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the first start port 5442, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays a variation display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the second starting port 440, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit gaming states are provided as gaming states that shift from the normal gaming state.

  The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 indicate the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol being held (hereinafter referred to as “the special symbol variable display hold count”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of times of special symbol change display hold by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b is the same as that of the display LEDs 72a and 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is arranged at the upper part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and behind the upper front part 1000. And an upper back part 1100 disposed on the upper side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 19), a lower part 1200 disposed below the display area of the liquid crystal display apparatus 16, and a liquid crystal display A corner accessory 1300 is arranged so that a movable body described later is positioned at four corners of the display area of the device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 19), and is arranged on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball cage 1600, a main board case 1700, and each of the above-mentioned accessories and a main board case 1700 are attached to form a unit. And a rear box 1800 that. Details of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 provided in the back unit 176 will be described later.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing by the main CPU 101 when a game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 will be described.

  When the game ball wins the first start port 5442, the first start port switch 5472 detects the winning game ball and starts the first special symbol based on the game ball winning on the first special symbol display unit 73. The storage is suspended (the first special symbol variable display is started). As for the suspension of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, if a game ball is won at the first start port 5442 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, the start-up memory is released after the special symbol being displayed is stopped. When the game ball is won at the first start port 5442 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed, the hold of the start memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the first special symbol display unit 73 starts the variable display of the first special symbol.

  When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second starting port 440 is started. The storage is suspended (the second special symbol variable display is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, if a game ball wins at the second start opening 440 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is released after the special symbol during the variation display is stopped and displayed. When the game ball is won at the second starting port 440 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the second special symbol display unit 74 starts to display the variation of the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is displaying a special symbol variation display, the other display unit does not perform a special symbol variation display. . In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol regardless of which start memory is held first. Priority is given to the cancellation | release of the hold | maintenance about the start memory about, and the 2nd special symbol display part 73 performs the variable display of the 2nd special symbol.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to an upper limit of 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display is eight times, which is the total number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display due to winning in the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes on the liquid crystal display device 16 except in specific cases. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed with the first or second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 being stopped and stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as presentation identification information.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a win. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Moreover, the specific stop display mode in the case where the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the winning type. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to winning. Note that some of the winning types have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it is difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of the winning.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing information on special symbol games as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a first upper limit of four times are stored. There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (4) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol for the upper limit of four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (4) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a start memory.

  The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when power is cut off.

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, A second special symbol hold display section 76, a start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a big prize port solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, and the like. . When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. The main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing backup data in the event of a power interruption in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launch device 15 for launching game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation to the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

  Upon receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out the game ball. Further, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Supply and control to fire game balls.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted to the main control circuit 100 from the control circuit 200. FIG.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect corresponding to the progress of the game in accordance with a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium that can be read by a computer having control means. Any other embodiment may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the program, the table, and the like may not be recorded in advance but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and image data as image signals. And a D / A converter or the like for conversion.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to the game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The sound control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control related to sound generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a driving circuit for supplying a driving signal to each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. Has an accessory data ROM or the like stored therein.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400.

[Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is controlled by a user's operation, and a game ball payout control process is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When it is a “hit” in a special symbol game or a “hit” in a normal symbol game, the probability that a game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control process is more likely to be performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, there is a special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable symbol display in the special symbol game, and a single condition for the variable symbol normal symbol display in the normal symbol game. Some regular symbol starting prizes are also included.

  The “variable display” in the present specification is a concept in which the identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the start to the end of one special symbol game. For example, the variation effect of the identification symbol in one variable display. And stop production. The identification effect variation effect and stop effect may be performed a plurality of times in one variable display. Note that the fluctuating effect is an effect that is visually performed, and has a different meaning from the fluctuating display of variable display.

  In “variable display”, for example, “derivative display” in which a special symbol (identification symbol) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. In other words, in this specification, the operation from the start of “variable display” to “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

  (1) When there is a special symbol start winning in the special symbol game, random numbers (a jackpot determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 8).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, referring to whether or not various data such as random number values are stored by special symbol starting winnings, variable display of special symbols is performed on the condition that various data such as random number values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

  Next, when the variable symbol special display is started, the jackpot determination random number extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination is made. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the counter for symbol determination and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determining counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol for the stop display described above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special display to be stopped, the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect pattern associated with the special symbol variable display are referred to, and the variable display control processing for controlling the special symbol variable display And the effect control process which performs a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached. In this determination process, if it is determined that a “hit” is reached, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been reached, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the game is not “big hit”, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state in a normal time different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As the normal gaming state, for example, in the above-described jackpot determination, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a “hit” (hereinafter referred to as “high probability gaming state”) or a special symbol start winning is easily obtained. Gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “time-short gaming state”). Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start variable symbol special display is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a start during a special symbol change display, various data acquired at the time of the start win (a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random number, etc. ) Is stored until a condition for starting variable display of special symbols is satisfied. As described above, storing various data until the condition for starting variable display of special symbols is satisfied is called “holding”, and the various data held is called starting storage.

  In other words, if a game ball wins a start during a special symbol variation display, the special symbol variable display (variation display) corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The variable display of the special symbol that is put on hold is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol that is on hold is also referred to as “holding ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get a hold ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is not shown in FIG. 8, it determines the winning of the holding ball (the presence / absence of “big hit” winning) based on the information of the holding ball described above, and further, the determination result A function for performing a predetermined effect based on that, that is, a pre-reading effect function is provided.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 8). (See processing flow).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination processing, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, with one condition that the random number value is stored. Determine.

  Next, when starting normal symbol variable display, the random number value extracted from the counter for hit determination is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not “win” is set. Thereafter, variation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, referring to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that “winning” is achieved, a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

  In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings as described above, in particular, the possibility of special symbol start winning of a game ball in a special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be “winning”, the winning game control process is not executed. Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball depends on the conditions such as whether or not the game is a “hit” in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the game is the “hit” in the normal symbol game. The ease of processing changes.

  In this embodiment, as a random number extraction method, a soft random number method for generating random values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number value is determined from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the random number may be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random values.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal and displays various effects in the display area.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to (corresponding to) a special symbol displayed on a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is displayed in the display area. Is displayed. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74), for example, from 1 to 8, except for specific cases. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) made up of numbers, various characters, etc. are displayed in a variable manner in the display area.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. The

  When the special symbol stopped in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”). , An effect image for allowing the player to grasp that it is a “big hit” is displayed in the display area.

  As an effect for allowing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect image relevant to the display content of the 1st special symbol hold display part 75 mentioned later and the 2nd special symbol hold display part 76 is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, in the display area, hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings (starting storage number) of the variable symbol variable display is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information on the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the notice notification at this time is also displayed in the display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 described later is in a predetermined form, an effect image that allows the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A function for displaying may be further provided.

[Special symbol display section]
The special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) are arranged in the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) are display devices that variably display (variable display and stop display) the special symbols in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols as symbols made up of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise a special symbol display part (1st special symbol display part 73, 2nd special symbol display part 74) by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 (special symbol starting prize). , Fluctuating display of special symbols (identification information). And the special symbol display part (the 1st special symbol display part 73, the 2nd special symbol display part 74) displays the special symbol stop display after performing the fluctuation display of the special symbol for a predetermined time.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the first start opening 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol. Further, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the second start opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit") First, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player.

  That is, in the special symbol display part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit gaming state. “Big hit”.

  In the big hit gaming state, the big prize opening 53 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball wins the first start opening 5442, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74). When the stop display is made in this manner, the special winning opening 53 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And if any one of these conditions is satisfied, the big prize opening which was in the open state is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the special winning opening 53 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round games, the big prize opening is closed.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74), when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is an aspect other than a specific aspect (an "losing" aspect) The gaming state does not change except when the falling lottery is won.

  In other words, in the special symbol game, the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a game whose state is shifted or maintained.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 5442 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (the number of holding balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept.

[Normal symbol display section]
The normal symbol display unit 71 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. And in this embodiment, the normal symbol display part 71 is arrange | positioned on the left side of the special symbol display part (the 1st special symbol display part 73, the 2nd special symbol display part 74) seeing from the player side.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays a normal symbol (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 includes a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . And in the normal symbol display part 71, the display pattern comprised by lighting / extinguishing of each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the variation of the normal symbol by alternately turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 performs normal symbol stop display after performing a normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display portion 71, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a “winning” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the normal symbol display unit 71, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of the variable symbol variable display. The normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs. Each normal symbol hold display LED is turned on / off to display the number of normal symbols variable display hold.

  Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays a normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold, and the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold. Up to four lights.

[First special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display section 75 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 75 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the first special symbol being held (the hold ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display section 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on according to the number of reserved special symbols.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display section 76 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol being held (the hold ball of the second special symbol), and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 A plurality of second special symbol hold display LEDs are provided.

  Specifically, the second special symbol hold display unit 76 displays the second special symbol hold display LED in accordance with the number of variable display hold numbers of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED 2 A maximum of 4 lights are turned on according to the number of reserved special symbols.

  Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The winning random number determination table (first starting port) is based on the big hit determining random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, and “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lost”. One of the above is referred to to determine by lottery. The winning random number determination table (second starting port) is determined by lottery based on the random number value for determining the big hit when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 by lottery. Referenced when doing.

  The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining a lottery result performed in response to the start opening prize. More specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is a value indicating a lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 5442, one of “big hit”, “small win”, and “losing” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the winning random number determination table (at the time of the first start opening winning), “big hit”, “small hit” for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”). And a range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination in which winning of each of “losing” is determined, and corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data”, “small hit determination value data”, and “losing determination value”) Data ”). The probability variation flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is “high probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “1”, and when it is “low probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the winning determination random value is any one of “0” to “204” at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, “big hit” is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, in this case, the winning probability of “big hit” (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the first start opening 5442 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for winning determination is any one of “205” to “409”, “small winning” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  Further, at the time of winning the first start port 5442, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “409”, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, when the probability change flag is “1” and the random number for winning determination is any one of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, “big hit” is won, Determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “big hit” in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1 / 40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the first start opening 5442 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any one of “1638” to “1842”, “small hit” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319), which is the same as when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  Further, at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number value for winning determination is not any of “0” to “1842”, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 5442, the big hit probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “high probability game state”. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “high probability gaming state”, the big hit probability when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 is about eight times that when the gaming state is not the “high probability gaming state”. Get higher.

  Similarly, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for winning determination is any one of “0” to “204” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “big hit” is won and “ The “hit determination value data” is determined. That is, in this case, the winning probability of “big hit” (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the winning determination random value is not any of “0” to “204” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “Lose” is won and “Lose decision” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for winning judgment is any one of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “big hit” is won, Determination value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “big hit” in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1 / 40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “1” and the winning determination random value is not any of “0” to “1637” at the time of winning the second starting port 440, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the second start port 440, whether or not the game state at the time of winning is “high probability game state” without winning “small hit” Depending on whether or not the jackpot probability varies, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the “high probability gaming state” is about eight times higher than when the gaming state is the “low probability gaming state”.

[Design determination table]
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 and the above-described determination value data. This is referred to in order to select a “hit selection symbol command” and a “symbol designation command” which determine the stop symbol. The “success selection symbol command” is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the “symbol designation command” designates a symbol that is displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The design random number value is extracted from 0 to 99 (100 types), for example.

  According to the symbol determination table (first start port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “9”, 10/100 “Z0” is selected as the winning selection symbol command with the probability of “zA1” as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “10” to “19”, “z1” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the design random number value is any one of “20” to “29”, “z2” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “30” to “39”, “z3” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the design random number value is any one of “40” to “49”, “z4” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “50” to “95”, “z5” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. When jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is “96” or “97”, “z6” is selected as a symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and symbol designation “ZA4” is selected as the command. Also, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is “98” or “99”, “z7” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100 and symbol designation “ZA5” is selected as the command. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “0” to “99”, “z8” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command at the time of hitting, “ZA6” is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA7” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second start port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “24”, 25 “Z9” is selected as the symbol selection command with a probability of / 100, and “zA8” is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the design random number value is any one of “25” to “49”, “z10” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. “ZA8” is selected as the symbol designating command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the design random number value is any one of “55” to “99”, “z11” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. “ZA9” is selected as the symbol designation command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA10” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type such as the number of rounds, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned on, and whether or not the hourly flag is turned on in accordance with the winning time selection symbol command related to the jackpot. . In the present embodiment, if the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the time reduction flag is set to “1”. The number of time reductions at this time is determined as any one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100 times, and the determined time reduction number is set. The probability variation flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is “high probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “1”, and when it is “low probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”. Similarly, the short time flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “short time gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “1”, and when it is “non-time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “0”. The number of times reduced is the number of changes in the special symbol game in which the time-saving gaming state can be continued. That is, when the special symbol variation (lottery of special symbols) is performed for the short time (100 times) without winning a big win in the short time gaming state, the short time gaming state is ended and a transition to the non-short time gaming state is made. In this embodiment, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. However, when a special symbol change (special symbol lottery) for a predetermined number of times is performed without winning a big win, the high probability gaming state may be terminated and the low probability gaming state may be entered.

  According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is “z0”, the number of rounds is “8”, and the jackpot of probability variation flag off and hourly flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z1”, the number of rounds is “8” and the big hit of probability variation flag OFF and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z3”, the number of rounds is “8” and the big hit of probability variation flag off and hourly flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z4”, the number of rounds is “8” and the big hit of probability variation flag OFF and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z5”, the number of rounds is “8” and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z6”, the number of rounds is “5”, and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z7”, the number of rounds is “16” and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z9”, the number of rounds is “5” and the big hit of probability variation flag OFF and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z10”, the number of rounds is “5” and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is “z11”, the number of rounds is “16” and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit with the short flag flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (that is, the big hit judgment value data). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit judgment value data is not necessarily limited thereto. Depending on, the big hit of the short time flag off may be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of time reductions among 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time-short gaming state may be controlled until the next big hit is won, or the time-short gaming state may be controlled as long as the high-probability gaming state continues.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 controls the high-probability gaming state to continue until the next big hit is won. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (then, the game moves to a low-probability gaming state), or until the next big jackpot is won (for example, 10000) in relation to the jackpot winning probability. It may be controlled so that the highly probable gaming state continues (until times) or may be controlled so that the highly probable gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game balls]
In the following, the flow of game balls launched toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is an example of a diagram illustrating a manner in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 13 is an example of a diagram illustrating a manner in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram illustrating a manner in which the game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened.

  As described above, the attacker unit 500 is disposed in the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passing gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, so-called right-handed is performed. When the big winning opening 540 is in the open state by the shutter 610, the game ball that has been hit to the right is likely to win the big winning opening 540. Moreover, even if it is not a big hit game state, right-handed is performed also during electric support.

  However, when the player hits the right side, the game ball that has flowed down the right region loses his sense of expectation when he does not win the big prize opening 540 and just waits to flow into the outlet 57 as it is. End up. Therefore, when the right-handed game ball does not win the big prize opening 540, the player feels disadvantageous and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be enlarged, and there are currently limited places where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be placed in the game area 20. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 has to be disposed below the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, it becomes more prominent that the right-handed game ball flows into the out port 57 as long as it does not win the big winning port 540.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left portion of the game area 20. In addition, the attacker unit 500 includes a game ball guiding member 580. This game ball guiding member 580 is a right-handed (flowing down the right area) and game ball that has not won the big prize opening 540, including the guide nail 700, in the game area 20 where the out mouth 57 is arranged. A member that leads to the upstream of the blade member 4620 disposed in the left region beyond the center, and that forms a path of the game ball that is extended on the extension line of the big prize opening 540 toward the flow-down direction of the game ball It is. Here, “upstream of the blade member 4620” is an area in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as “second starting port receiving” in this specification). Area). The second start port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

  The game area 20 is a game ball guiding member that serves as a flow path for a game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right area) and reaches the exit side of the big prize opening 540 without winning the big prize opening 540. A flow-down path connecting the exit side portion of 580 and the out port 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. The game ball flowing down this flow path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol determination shifts to the high-probability gaming state triggered by the end of the jackpot gaming state. Member 4620 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when the wing member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, if the game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right side area) does not win the big prize opening 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guide nail 700 to the second start port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

  Of the game balls that have been hit right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that have not won the big prize opening 540 are always guided to the second start opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620. If the wing member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the start port receiving area, it is received by the wing member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second start port 440 is received. The chance of winning a prize is increasing. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second port is replaced with the out port 57. The start port 440 is the most downstream position. Thus, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

  In this way, even if a game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right side area) does not win the big prize opening 540, the game ball must always reach the second start port reception area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since it is led, the expectation to win the second start opening 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In particular, right-handed is performed in the electric support state. For this reason, the prize winning port 540 is not opened during the electric support, but the most downstream position is changed from the out port 57 to the second start port 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the game progresses in the electric support state. It is promoted and can be interesting.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 13, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the game balls that have been hit right (flowing down the right region) and have not won the big prize opening 540 are Although it is always guided to the upstream side of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

  Of the game balls that have been hit to the right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that have not reached the big prize opening 540 (for example, the game balls that have flowed down the down flow passage from the right side of the general prize opening 56 to the out port 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the right-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the big prize opening 540, but did not win the game balls that reached the big prize opening 540, but did not reach the big prize opening 540 There are game balls that have not been won, but either game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, the left-handed game ball (game ball that has flowed down the left region) generally wins the first start port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, It flows into the outlet 57 or the outlet 450. After the game ball is left-handed, the game ball 224 rolling on the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a winning expectation at the first start port 5442, but toward the first start port 5442. With respect to the game balls 2226 that have been removed from the flow path 222 and have not won the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the first starting opening in the conventional pachinko machine (corresponding to the first starting opening 5442 in the present embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize will be lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442, if the first start port 5442 is not won, the winning expectation will be lost at that time. In the present embodiment, the left-handed game ball (the game ball that has flowed down the left region) rolls through the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not win the first start port 5442, and In any case where the game balls are removed from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and have not won the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, these game balls reach the out port 57. In the meantime, it always passes through the second start port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region (second start port receiving region) where the game ball can be received in the second start port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. In the case of rolling the flow path 222 toward the one start port 5442 but not winning the first start port 5442, and when the flow is removed from the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 are further removed. In any case where no prize is received, the expectation to win the second start port 440 continues, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region, the expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is released when left-handed is low. However, immediately after the big hit gaming state or the short-time gaming state is ended, the change display of the normal symbol may be held. Further, even if the player is making a left strike, the game ball that has jumped out of the game area 20 may flow down the right area. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 immediately flows into the out port 57 not only for the game ball that has flowed down the right region but also for the game ball that has flowed down to the guide member 700 side by momentum. Since it has the function to suppress, if the blade member 4620 is opened, there is a possibility of winning the second start port 440. Therefore, even if the winning expectation to the first starting opening 5442 and the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 is lost for the left-handed game ball, the expectation to win the second starting opening 440 continues. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the passing gate 49 is disposed in the right region, but instead, the passing gate 491 may be disposed in the left region. In this case, there is a possibility that the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened is increased as compared with the case where the passage gate 49 is disposed in the right region. Therefore, even if the game ball that has been left-handed loses its expectation of winning at the first start opening 5442, it is possible to continue with higher expectations regarding winning at the second start opening 440. .

  Of the game balls that have been hit left (game balls that have flowed down the left area), the game balls that have not reached the top of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or have not reached the first start port 5442 are, for example, You may comprise so that the game ball which flowed down the outflow path which leads to the out port 450 (for example, refer FIG. 3, FIG. 49) or the out port 57 which exists under the normal electric accessory unit 400 may exist. At this time, among the left-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the first start opening 5442 are the upper ones of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first start opening 5442, and the normal There are game balls that have reached the upper part of the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first start opening 5442 but have not won a prize, but any of the game balls may be led to the upstream of the blade member 4620. Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream side of the blade member 4620.

  Further, when a game ball that rolls in the direction of the big prize opening 540 out of the left-handed game balls (game balls that have flowed down the left region) rolls the game ball guide member 580, the game ball is the big prize opening 540. It collides with a rib provided on the shutter 610 or the game ball guiding member 580 and wins the first start port 5442 or flows into the out 55 or the out port 450.

  Further, in the present embodiment, game balls that have been hit right (flowing down the right side area) and have not won the big prize opening 540 are always left beyond the center of the gaming area 20 where the out mouth 57 is arranged. A game ball guiding member 580 that leads to the second start port receiving area of the area is provided. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right area) and did not win the big prize opening 540) to the second start opening receiving area. It may not be necessary to have to be led to the left area beyond the center of the game area 20. For example, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left region, but the game ball guided to the left region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second start port receiving region. This is equivalent to the configuration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right (flowing down the right region) and has not won the big prize opening 540 is guided to the left region by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not necessarily required, and for example, a structure in which a game ball that has been hit right and has not won the big prize opening 540 may be guided to the left region only by a guide nail.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right region) and reaches the exit side of the big prize opening 540 without winning the big prize opening 540. A flow path connecting the outlet side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and game balls flowing down this flow path always pass through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is supposed to be. In the present embodiment, since the second start port 440 is formed in the left region, the game balls flowing down the flow path are always guided to the left region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the above route always passes through the second start opening receiving area before reaching the out opening 57, in such a case, the second start opening 440 is moved to the left area. It is not essential to be placed.

[Configuration of back unit]
Below, the structure of the back unit 176 is demonstrated using FIGS. 15-20. FIG. 15 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 16 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 17 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 18 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from the upper left obliquely on the back side. FIG. 19 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 when viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 20 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as seen from the upper left obliquely upper side.

  As described above, the back unit 176 includes the upper front part 1000, the upper back part 1100, the lower part 1200, the corner part 1300, the side part 1400, the middle panel 1500, and the attack ball bulb 1600. And at least a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. The corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

  The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially at the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are disposed in the opening 1820.

  An upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, a base member 1180 (see FIG. 67, for example) described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back part 1100 will be described later.

  A lower accessory 1200 (specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 (for example, see FIG. 75) described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

  A side accessory 1400 (specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (see, for example, FIG. 105) described later) is attached and fixed to the right side of the front side opening 1820 of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

  The first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the upper corner combination 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 86) is on the front side of the upper back combination movable decoration 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, respectively. The third movable body 1355 is at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner combination 1350 is in front of the lower combination 1200. And fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 are arrange | positioned so that it may become a substantially the same position in the front-back direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

  An upper front accessory 1000 (specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (for example, see FIG. 59) to be described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be disposed in front of the upper rear accessory 1000. The Details of the upper front object 1000 will be described later.

  The middle panel 1500 is disposed in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back surface of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member having a pattern and a pattern on the front surface, and the pattern and pattern on the front surface can be visually recognized through the transparent panel 172. Although the details will be described later, the second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

  The attacker ball bowl 1600 is a bowl-shaped bowl that accepts a game ball won in the general prize opening 56 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the big prize opening 540 are merged and discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board case 1700 accommodates a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

  The back unit 176 further includes a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without moving.

[Attacker unit]
Below, the structure of the attacker unit 500 is demonstrated in detail using FIGS. 21-32.

  The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front side plate portion 520, a guide path 530, a special winning opening 540, a rear side case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

  The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 and FIGS. 28 and 29 is a member that is the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is disposed with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction and its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

  The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper part of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left in a front view. In the slit 511, a shutter 610 described later (more specifically, a guide portion 611 of the shutter 610) is disposed.

  The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 21 to 25 and FIG. 27 is a member disposed at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front side plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front side plate portion 520 is disposed with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed in a state of being spaced forward from the base member 510. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as “special electric appliance space R2”) is formed between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 so that a game ball can enter. In addition, the special electric appliance space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 in a front view. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via a screw or the like. The front side plate part 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate part 520.

  The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 to 29 guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction as appropriate. The guide path 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) standing rearward from the front side plate portion 520. The guide path 530 includes a first guide path 531, a second guide path 532, and a third guide path 533.

  As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via a slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward relative to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 has advanced forward relative to the base member 510 (the state where the first guide path 531 is formed).

  The first guiding path 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is slightly shorter than the base member 510. The left end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The right end portion of the first guiding path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right to the left. The first guide path 531 includes a speed reduction rib 534.

  The deceleration rib 534 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 includes a plurality of rear protrusions 534a that protrude forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front protrusions 534b that protrude rearward from the front plate portion 520. In the present embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear protrusions 534a and front protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. Further, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (does not face in the front-rear direction but shift in the left-right direction).

  With such a configuration of the first guide path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 531) moves in a zigzag shape in plan view while colliding with the rear protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the moving speed is reduced.

  In this way, when the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first guide path 531 is decreased, a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 can be created. As described above, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guide path 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. Then, the winning prize opening 540 can be won. That is, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly. Even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if a lot of game balls stay on the shutter 610, many winnings can be generated. In addition, since a large number of game balls can be won at once, it is easy to generate more wins (so-called over wins) than the number that can be won in one round of a big hit game.

  The second taxiway 532 is disposed immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electrical equipment space R2. The second guide path 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The tilt angle of the second guide path 532 is formed substantially the same as the tilt angle of the first guide path 531. Thus, the second guiding path 532 is configured as one substantially straight guiding path that is gently inclined from the right to the left together with the first guiding path 531. The second guiding path 532 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the first guiding path 531 side).

  The third guiding path 533 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the special electric utility space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guide path 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The third guiding path 533 is disposed below the first guiding path 531. The third guiding path 533 is formed in the same shape and size as the first guiding path 531 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is arranged between the left end portion of the third guide path 533 and the left end portion of the first guide path 531. In addition, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is disposed between the right end portion of the third guide path 533 and the right end portion of the second guide path 532. Thus, the third guide path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

  The third guide path 533 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the big prize opening 540 side). The third guide path 533 includes a guide part 535.

  The guide part 535 is formed at the lowermost part of the third guide path 533. The guide part 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide portion 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

  25, FIG. 26, FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big prize opening 540 is formed at the rear of the lowermost portion of the third guide path 533 (the rear of the guide portion 535). The big prize opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 25, the count switch 541 is disposed below the special winning opening 540.

  The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 21, 23 to 25, 29, 31, and 32 includes various members (a shutter 610, a prize winning solenoid 620, a link arm 630, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 31, the rear case 550 divides an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a two-story structure by the placement portion 551, and predetermined members are disposed in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are disposed in the upper space. In the lower space, a big prize solenoid 620 and the like are arranged. The rear side case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511.

[Special electric parts]
Below, the structure of the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment is demonstrated in detail using FIGS. 33-48.

  The special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state where the game ball can be easily won in the big prize opening 540 (open state) and a state where it is difficult to win the game ball in the big prize port 540 (closed state). However, in the following description, the arrangement of various members will be described as being in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the special electric accessory 6000 includes a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a special prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

  The housing portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a member for housing various members (the shutter 6002, the special prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, the restricting member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating part 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side opened. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 21 and the like) via screws and the like. The housing portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss 6013, and a guide opening 6014.

  The communication opening 6011 communicates the upper side and the lower side of the housing part 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the housing portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the housing portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround from the rear to the right of a boss 6013 described later in plan view.

  The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed at the right rear portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011.

  The boss part 6013 supports a regulating member 6005 described later so as to be rotatable. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to protrude upward. The boss part 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the housing part 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in the plan view and on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. Note that, in appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 33 to 35, the boss portion 6013 shows a state in which screws are attached to support the regulating member 6005.

  The guide opening 6014 is for inserting a guide shaft 6056 of a regulating member 6005 described later. More specifically, as will be described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the housing portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the housing portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view that is bent halfway from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 36A, the guide opening 6014 includes a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017.

  The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss 6013. Note that the length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of a connection opening 6036 of a prize winning solenoid 6003 described later.

  The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend in an arc shape in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap with a part of an imaginary circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed line arrow in FIG. 36A). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013 so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss portion 6013 in plan view. The rear end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is connected to the left end portion of the first guide opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013.

  The shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the special prize opening 540 by power from a special prize opening solenoid 6003 described later. The configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 29, FIG. 30C, etc.). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connection plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

  The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guide path 531 (see FIG. 29 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction in plan view and the left side is lowered in front view (the upper side faces the upper left).

  The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023 described later. The connection plate 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. Connection plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from the center portion of elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

  The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed so as to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connection plate portion 6022.

  In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 29 and the like) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  The big prize opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 34, 35, and 37 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The big prize opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing part 6031, a power generation part 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission part 6034 and a spring 6035.

  The solenoid housing portion 6031 is a member that houses various members constituting the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side opened. The solenoid housing part 6031 is arranged with the longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below.

  The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates the power of the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The power generation unit 6032 includes a coil, a fixed iron core, etc. (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck a plunger 6033 described later in response to energization from a predetermined power source. The power generation unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation unit 6032 is housed inside (left part) of the solenoid housing part 6031 with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction.

  The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generation unit 6032. Plunger 6033 is configured to be capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction with respect to power generation unit 6032.

  The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the special prize opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (right part) of the solenoid housing part 6031 and attached to the right end part of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

  The connection opening 6036 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. Connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of power transmission unit 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed so as to penetrate the power transmission unit 6034 in the vertical direction.

  The connection protrusion 6037 is connected to a restriction member 6005 described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed so as to protrude upward. The pair of plate-like portions are formed to be parallel to each other on the left and right. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-like portions. The connecting projection 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission unit 6034. In the following, the connecting protrusion 6037 refers to the gap.

  The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is disposed between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state where the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. Thus, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission unit 6034).

  In the large winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the biasing force of the spring 6035 by the suction force of the power generation unit 6032. In this way, in the special winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on and off the power generation unit 6032, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

  In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward, so that the game ball It will be in a state (closed state) where it is difficult to win a prize at the large winning opening 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to the game ball big prize opening 540. It becomes a state (open state) where the winning of is easy.

  The link arm 6004 shown in FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and FIG. 38 connects the winning prize opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 so as to be interlocked (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the winning prize opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view by a portion extending in the left-right direction (first link extension portion 6041) and a portion extending in the front-rear direction (second link extension portion 6042). Is done. The link arm 6004 includes a central tube portion 6043, a connection opening 6044, a connection shaft 6045, and a regulation protrusion 6046.

  The central cylinder part 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing part 6001. The central tube portion 6043 is formed in the approximate center of the link arm 6004 (a connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central cylinder portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylinder portion 6043 in plan view.

  The connection opening 6044 is inserted through the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connection opening 6044 is formed at the left (front) end of the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed so as to penetrate the first link extension 6041 in the vertical direction. The connection opening 6044 is formed in a long hole shape that linearly extends from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the short direction in plan view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

  The connecting shaft 6045 is connected to the connecting opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extension 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (the length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003.

  The restricting protrusion 6046 comes into contact with a restricting block 6054 of a restricting member 6005 described later in a predetermined case. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape that protrudes downward. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the first link extending portion 6041 and on the front left side of the central tube portion 6043 in plan view. The rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

  A regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and 39 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in a closed state. The restricting member 6005 includes a central cylindrical portion 6053, a restricting block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055 and a guide shaft 6056.

  The central cylinder portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in the approximate center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. Further, the central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view.

  In addition, a plate-like portion (first regulation extending portion 6051) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylindrical portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central cylinder portion 6053, a plate-like portion (second restriction extension portion 6052) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed. Thus, the central cylindrical portion 6053, the first restriction extending portion 6051, and the second restriction extending portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. When the boss portion 6013 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylindrical portion 6053 in plan view.

  The restriction block portion 6054 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion protruding upward. The restriction block portion 6054 is formed in the approximate center of the first restriction extension portion 6051 (that is, the right rear side of the central cylinder portion 6053) in plan view. The front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

  The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in the approximate center of the first restriction extension 6051 (that is, the right rear side of the center cylinder 6053) in plan view. Thus, the shaft center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the shaft center of the restriction block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting projection 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 (that is, the gap of the connecting projection 6037).

  The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in the approximate center of the second restriction extension 6052 (that is, the left side of the central cylinder 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the short direction of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) in plan view.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35 and FIGS. 40 to 44, the assembly configuration of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. To do.

  43 and subsequent drawings, the housing portion 6001 is indicated by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening 6014 are indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In FIG. 43 and subsequent drawings, the link arm 6004 is indicated by a broken line, but the restriction protrusion 6046 is indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Also, in the drawings after FIG. 44, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

  First, an outline of an assembly configuration of various members (the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005) with respect to the housing portion 6001 will be described.

  The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. Thus, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  The big prize opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the housing part 6001 (the power transmission part 6034 of the big prize solenoid 6003) are communicated with each other through the communication opening part 6011.

  Further, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central tube portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 is supported by the housing portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view around the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001.

  Further, a boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is supported by the housing portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001.

  Next, the detail of the assembly structure of various members is demonstrated.

  As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is moved downward to the housing portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. And protruding. The connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connection opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the special prize opening solenoid 6003 are coupled to each other via the coupling shaft 6045 and the coupling opening 6036.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is disposed so as to come into contact with the left edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize solenoid 6003.

  Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted from below into the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are connected to each other via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023 so as to be interlocked with each other.

  Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 comes into contact with the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the rear side surface of the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. There is surface contact (not contact).

  Further, in the state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is the central cylinder of the regulating member 6005. It arrange | positions so that the left side edge part of the part 6053 may contact | abut.

  Further, in a state where the restricting member 6005 is supported by the boss part 6013 of the accommodating part 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 protrudes below the accommodating part 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating part 6001. Is done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the clearance of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are coupled via the coupling shaft 6055 and the coupling projection 6037 so as to be interlocked with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 is disposed in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the special winning opening solenoid 6003.

  In addition, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001.

  As shown in FIG. 44B, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening of the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. It arrange | positions so that it may be located in the part 6016 (more specifically, it contact | abuts with the right end part of the 1st induction | guidance | derivation opening part 6016).

  As described above, in the state where the left edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guiding opening 6016. It will be in the state contact | abutted with the right end part.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 48, when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state, the shutter 6002 is unintentionally opened by the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001 (more specifically). Will be described in detail on the regulation of unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002.

  In this embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening according to the power generated by the big prize solenoid 6003 but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). Or an opening in response to an unauthorized act on the shutter 6002 performed by an unauthorized person.

  In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. In the following description, a state in which the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restriction member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001 is referred to as a “lock state”.

  In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide rearward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023 are used. A force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are rearward (that is, the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). Abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted, the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 counterclockwise from the link arm 6004 to the restriction member 6005. A rotating force is transmitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 44B, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 and Arranged so as to abut. That is, the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter, the front edge) is disposed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 (the moving direction when the restriction member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48A, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is the first. The restriction member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016.

  Thus, since the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the regulating member 6005 cannot also rotate. In addition, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 that transmits force to the link arm 6004 cannot move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain a closed state.

  As described above, when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016, the intention of the shutter 6002 is determined by the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001. Opening (more specifically, unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

  In the locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the rear side surface of the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 The front side surfaces are pressed with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are not in point contact with each other as described above, each durability is improved. Can be made.

  Hereinafter, a configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

  As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the special prize opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the regulating member 6005 and the housing portion 6001. The locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

  When the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generating unit 6032 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is done. When the power generation unit 6032 is energized, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, and power is generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003. When the movement of the plunger 6033 to the left is started, the power transmission unit 6034 (the connection opening 6036 and the connection protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 similarly moves to the left.

  When the connection projection 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulation member 6005 via the connection projection 6037 and the connection shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005. . Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the restriction member 6005 to the left. Thus, when the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  Specifically, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 abuts on the boss portion 6013. In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001, and the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

  In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical part 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss part 6013 (the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guiding opening of the housing part 6001). The movement until the left end portion 6016 is brought into contact with the left end portion is referred to as “first movement of the power transmission portion 6034”. Further, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guiding opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001). Is referred to as “second movement of the power transmission unit 6034”.

  Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left by the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. The right edge of the connection opening 6036 abuts on the connection shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 at all during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) and the regulation The timing at which the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 contacts the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all. It is set substantially the same.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 and the front of the guide shaft 6056 (the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In the moving direction in the case of performing, the front edge of the first guide opening 6016 is disposed. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved. Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the housing 6001 is continued.

  Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the restricting member 6005, but not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). Thus, although the regulating member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

  In this state, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the power transmission unit 6034 moves further leftward (when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting projection of the power transmission unit 6034 The power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6037 and the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the restriction member 6005 to the left.

  Here, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013. That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001.

  Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 of the housing portion 6001 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017). It is touched. Note that the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap with a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013. In other words, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (the moving direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along the trajectory of the guide shaft 6056 moving ( There is nothing to interfere when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

  Thus, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, and the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, and the second guide opening 6017 moves forward. When the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

  Note that the regulating member 6005 varies the position of the rotation center in the left-right direction when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement as described above and when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 in contact with the left side edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. And Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 in contact with the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is set as the rotation center position.

  In this way, the regulating member 6005 has a different position at the center of rotation so that the front side of the first guiding opening 6016 is located in front of the guiding shaft 6056 (the moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It is switched whether there is an edge or the second guide opening 6017 extends.

  As described above, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the lock state of the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking unit) of the housing unit 6001 is released, and the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is housed. The second guide opening 6017 of the part 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting projection 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. To do.

  Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. Thus, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

  When the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement (when it is in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, with the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004. When a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restriction member 6005 through the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening. The restriction member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

  However, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 can move forward through the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 as described above. The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 also moves backward. When the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

  Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6060 of the regulation member 6005. Does not interfere with. That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

  When the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 through the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward. Thus, when the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts to slide backward.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the storage unit 6001. Thus, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

  As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state has been described. However, when the shutter 6002 is closed from the opened state, the energization of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is stopped, and then the shutter 6002 is opened. Various members (the shutter 6002, the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the restricting member 6005) operate in the reverse order to the case where they are performed.

  Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displaceable member that can be displaced between a position where the passing of the game ball is easy with respect to the passing area and a position where the passing of the game ball is difficult Is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

  In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between a position to be opened and a position to be closed).

  In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the lock portion provided in the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging projection portion provided in the door member come into contact with each other to close the device. The opening of the door member at the position can be restricted (locked).

  However, since the locking part and the engaging projection part require a certain degree of accuracy in the mutual positional relationship, if there is aging deterioration of the solenoid or contamination of the solenoid drive path, foreign matter is completely Will not touch. As described above, when the lock portion and the engagement projection portion are not completely in contact with each other, there is a possibility that the door member may be loose at the closing position or the door member may be slightly opened (unintentional displacement is performed). There was a possibility).

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and more reliably regulates unintended displacement of a displacement member when the displacement member is displaced at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass therethrough. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the game board 17 having the game area 20 where the game ball rolls, and the second start port 440 provided in the game area 20 and through which the game ball can pass. (Displacement area) and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced between a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass relative to the second start port 440 (pass area). And a main winning circuit solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). The displacement member is in a state in which displacement control is performed at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) allows the game ball to pass through the displacement member. When the control to displace the game ball is not performed, it is provided with locking means (the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass therethrough. The mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) is a power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation unit 6032 to the displacement member by contacting a power generation unit 6032 that generates power and at least a part of the displacement member. The locking means is in contact with at least a part of the displacement member, thereby regulating a restriction member 6005 (regulation portion) that regulates displacement of the displacement member, and a displacement path of the restriction portion. A guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), and the displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening 6. 16 (first displacement section) and a second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section) different from the first transmission section 6017 (second displacement section), the displacement member of the game ball at least partially in contact with the power transmission section 6034 The displacement is controlled to a position where passage is easy and a position where passage of the game ball is difficult, and the restriction member 6005 (restriction portion) is moved to the guide opening 6014 (displacement induction portion) as the power transmission portion 6034 is displaced. Displacement control is possible, and the locking means maintains the locked state of the displacement member when the restriction member 6005 (restriction portion) is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). When the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is positioned in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

  With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001) is, for example, only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located at the right end of the first guide opening 6016. Instead, while the guide shaft 6056 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016, the displacement member (the shutter 6002 and the link arm 6004) can be kept locked. That is, even when the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 is slightly shifted (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not disposed at a normal position), the locked state Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) includes movement and rotation, and the lock member includes the restriction member 6005 (restriction part). When positioned in one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is restricted from rotating while the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) can move. When the state is maintained and the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is positioned in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is restricted to the restriction. Different from the case where the member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated to release the locked state. Is shall.

  With such a configuration, the restricting member 6005 (the restricting portion), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, for example, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with a case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in this embodiment, the arrangement space of the parts is limited, and thus it is beneficial to have such a configuration.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) for guiding a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link unit) connected to the game ball guiding unit. The power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit).

  With such a configuration, since the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link portion) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion), the power transmission portion 6034 is not in direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) can be locked.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of an object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is an ordinary electric accessory or the like. May be.

  Further, when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is finished, the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. As described above, when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the restriction protrusion portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are brought into contact with each other. Can be released. That is, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation member 6005 of the link arm 6004 are rotated. Interference with the restriction block portion 6054 (restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

  Even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is finished, the state where the restriction projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 is maintained, and the link arm When 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005, thereby assisting the turning of the restricting member 6005. .

  Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide) is when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise when the power transmission portion 6034 is moving first (in the locked state). In addition, it may be formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (the moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In addition, from the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of normal electric accessory unit 400]
With reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described. FIG. 49 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 50 is a view of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning port 53, 54, 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. And a receiving member 443 that receives the game ball won in the second start port 440 and the game ball received in the out port 450 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front surfaces of the second start port 440 and the out port 450 A front cover 445 provided on the main body and a normal electric accessory 460. The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later passes.

  The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, the second start port 440 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  A wall 4452 that partitions the second start port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the back surface of the front cover 445. The wall 4452 prevents the game ball (game ball winning the second starting port 440) that has passed through the upper portion of the blade member 4620 from being received by the out port 450 when the blade member 4620 is opened. It has a function of preventing the game ball from winning the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

  The second start port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second start port 440 so that a game ball won in the second start port 440 can be detected.

  The housing member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at portions corresponding to the second start port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. The second start port 440 is won and detected by the second start port switch 441. The game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected in a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). In addition, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotation shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later passes.

[Configuration of ordinary electric accessory 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG. 51 is an example of a diagram illustrating the ordinary electric accessory 460, the second start port switch 441, and the housing member 443. FIG. 52 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 53 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed obliquely from the upper right.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a start port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

  The base cover 4610 is attached to the back side of the opening forming member 420 after accommodating the start port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the housing member 443. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A long guide groove 4612 in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, a bearing (not shown) that rotatably supports a pin 4648 described later is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610.

  The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotation shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of a blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotating shaft 4622 is cut out at a portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power transmission mechanism 4640 transmits the power from the start-port solenoid 4630 to the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotational force, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotation center. In the present embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in a closed state when standing up, and is in an open state when the blade member 4620 is rotated in the right direction around the rotation shaft 4622 from the closed state.

  The start-up solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the distal end of the plunger 4632 (the distal end on the right side when viewed from the front). The start-up solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state where the plunger 4632 extends in the right direction when viewed from the front, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the left direction (the contraction direction) when viewed from the front.

  The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts this power into a rotational force 4602 of the blade member 4620 and transmits it as the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to the blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630, the flange connecting member 4646, and the blade connecting member 4642. And a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646 and the flange connecting member 4646.

  The blade connecting member 4642 includes a bearing 46444 that supports the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the blade. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotation shaft 4622 about the rotation shaft 4622. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 that protrudes to the back side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotation shaft 4622 that is supported by a bearing 46424.

  The link member 4644 is a U-shaped member when viewed from the front, and a long hole 46442 is formed at an end portion below the front view. A support shaft 46426 of a blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. A support shaft 46446 that protrudes to the back side is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 in front view. An engaging shaft 46448 is formed below the support shaft 46446 so as to project to the back side. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed at the center of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the character changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable about a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444. When the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engagement shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

  The flange connection member 4646 includes a flange holding portion 46462, a connection hole 46464, and an engagement groove 46466. The flange clamping portion 46462 clamps the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the expansion / contraction direction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands / contracts. The support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connection hole 46464 so as to be able to move in the connection hole 46464. An engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Here, the engagement shaft 46448 has a hook shape having a pointed end in a cross-sectional shape crossing the longitudinal direction. Then, the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at the tip portion. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 that is long in the left-right direction on the back side (base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Explanation of operation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 54 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a closed state (illustrated by a one-dot chain line), and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is in a state of transition from the closed state toward the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (illustrated with a continuous line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 55 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a transition state (illustrated by a one-dot chain line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in an open state (solid line). FIG.

  When the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in the front view (rightward in FIGS. 54 and 55)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 49 and 50) moves in the contraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 with the flange clamping portion 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 is moved to the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. Rotate counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 54 and 55) visually. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connection hole 46464 of the flange connection member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as viewed from the front, the support shaft 46426 slidably coupled within the elongated hole 46442 of the blade coupling member 4642 is obtained. The blade coupling member 4642 rotates around the rotation shaft 4622 as the center of rotation, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

  The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state moves in the direction in which the plunger 4632 extends due to the start port solenoid 4630 being de-energized, and the movement opposite to the operation from the closed state to the open state Is done by. The portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 so that the engagement shaft 46448 is smoothly engaged with the engagement groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 is operated from the open state to the closed state. Is inclined toward the lower right direction (the lower left direction in FIGS. 54 and 55) in a front view.

[Functional explanation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) a diagram for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating that opening | releasing of the blade member 4620 is accept | permitted. In FIGS. 56A and 56B, the start-port solenoid 4630 is not shown.

  When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 (both see FIG. 54, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 56A). Therefore, as long as the plunger 4632 does not move in the contraction direction (unless special circumstances such as failure occur, unless the start port solenoid 4630 is excited), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened. Therefore, even if a force is applied from the outside to open the blade member 4620 illegally, this can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is opened (see FIG. 56 (b)).

  In this way, the link member 4644 that forms the engagement shaft 46448, the flange connection member 4646 that forms the engagement groove 46466, and the start port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Composition of upper front part 1000]
With reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, the configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described. FIG. 57 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (mode when in the origin position). FIG. 58 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 59 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 when viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 60 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The upper front accessory 1000 is operable with respect to a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040; A force transmission member 1020 that transmits power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. And a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 60) for detecting the position of the movable decorative body 1040.The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

  The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be positioned in front of the upper back surface accessory 1100. A first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014 connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020 are formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1010. In addition, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the base plate 1010 has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later is located, and the movable decorative body 1040 at the origin position. , A notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a later-described coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040 is formed. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a back side first notch 1016 and a back side second notch 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 1062 formed at the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to a movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. A hole 1018 corresponding to a movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068 described later is formed.

  The decoration plate 1030 is decorated on the front side although not shown. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch 1016 on the back side) when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. A notch 1036 is formed, and a notch 1038 is formed at a position where the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the rear-side second notch 1017). In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front side first notch 1036 and a front side second notch 1038, respectively.

  The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower side end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a later described. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

  The drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor attachment member 1054. The drive motor 1050 is a motor with a reduction gear, and the rotational speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1052.

  The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

  A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. Thus, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the rotation center.

  The fourth gear 1067 is formed with a boss 10672 at a portion on the front surface side that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10474 in the radial direction. In the position detection gear 1068, a position detection piece 10682 is formed at a portion on the front side that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

  The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. And a second transmission member 1026 to which the power from 1022 is transmitted through the rack 1024.

  The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-like member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 extends from the radially outer side to the inner side (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the side 1022a on the left side in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongate hole 10224 is formed in the direction of heading. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 that penetrates the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable in the elongated hole 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, a bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b in the front view. The bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

  The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-like member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The second transmission member 1026 is formed with a bearing 10262 at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and at the right end when viewed from the front. A bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. The second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 that is coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). The gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

  A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a bar-like member provided substantially horizontally. A gear 10244 is formed on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) when viewed from the front, and a gear 10248 is formed on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) when viewed from the front. Is formed. The gear 10244 is meshed with the gear 10228 and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the motive power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits it to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a long hole 10242 that is long in the substantially horizontal direction on the right side (gear 10244 side) in front view, and a long hole 10246 that is long in the substantially horizontal direction on the left side (gear 10248 side) in front view. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242, and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246.

  The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located at the front side second notch 1038 and the back side second notch 1017.

  The photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be positioned in a photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided in the position detection gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Explanation of operation of upper front object 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. 61 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 62 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 63 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. In FIG. 61 to FIG. 63, the constituent members and the like of the force transmission member 1020 are indicated by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

  When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Accordingly, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. To do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 engaged with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front with the center 10664 of the fourth gear 1067 as the rotation center. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise around the center 10474 as the center of rotation, the boss 10672 also rotates in the circumferential direction around the center 10474 and moves clockwise along the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably coupled in the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 10474 as the center of rotation, the first transmission member 1022 (ie, the gear 10228) is moved to the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise around 1011 (bearing 10222) in front view. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation. Move to.

  Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise about the first support shaft 1011 in the front view, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the long hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the long hole 10246 function as a guide for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally in the right direction when viewed from the front, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation in the front view, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation. Move to.

  Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 are synchronized, and the clock is viewed from the front when the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 are the rotation centers, respectively. Operates around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 operates downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while arcing clockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

  When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 as the center of rotation. Rotate. Although the position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter, and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photosensor 1080, so that the fourth The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

  When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decoration 1040 arcs counterclockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state due to the reverse movement of the above movement. It moves upward while drawing.

  In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) is performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. This is performed based on the result of the hit determination performed in step (b). On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and based on the result of the hit determination from the next time onward. It will prepare for the movable body effect to be performed.

[Composition of upper back part 1100]
With reference to FIGS. 64-70, the structure of the upper back surface accessory 1100 is demonstrated. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 65 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 66 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 67 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back surface accessory 1100 as viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 68 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back surface accessory 1100 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. 69A is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 65, and FIG. 69B is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 70A is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 65, and FIG. 70B is an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in FIG.

  65 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (described later) formed in an extending portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. The BB line is a line that crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the vertical direction.

  The upper back surface 1100 is made of a substantially flat metal, has a substantially frame shape without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, a left drive mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right drive mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 that covers the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see it, and a right cover 1161, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see the right motor 1161, etc. By a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left driving mechanism 1150 and a right driving mechanism 1160, a movable decorative body 1110 movable up and down, and a pair of left and right coated decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. One end is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end is connected to the covering decorative body 1120. A pantograph mechanism 1170 that operates (shrinks in a substantially rhombus shape) as the movable decorative body 1110 moves up and down; a member that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170 and that is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180; A static decorative body 1196 that is a member having a decoration on the front surface and fixedly attached to the base member 1180 is provided.

  The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end portion of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end portion of the central plate portion 1182. 1186.

  A static decorative body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decorative body that is decorated and does not operate. A horizontally elongated central plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the center of the central plate portion 1182 so as to face upward. A front surface of the center plate 1188 has a pair of left support shaft 11882 and right support shaft 11884 that protrude forward.

  On the front surface of the central plate 1188, a regulating member 1190 is attached below the left and right support shafts 11882 and 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating above a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member, and has a left contact surface 1192 that inclines toward the lower left and a right contact surface 1194 that inclines toward the lower right.

  The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured such that the left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached can be attached. The left vertical plate portion 1184 is formed with a hole 11842 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor attachment member 1152 is attached. Further, a left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 in front view. The hole 11846 is formed corresponding to a locus along which a support shaft 11562 formed on the driven gear 1156 moves when a driven gear 1156 described later rotates.

  The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured such that the right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted can be mounted. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is mounted. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864 in a front view. The hole 11866 is formed corresponding to a locus along which a support shaft 1162 formed on the driven gear 1166 moves when a driven gear 1166 described later rotates.

  The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Among these, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11544 formed at one end (right side) of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation area of the left drive transmission member.

  The left motor 1151 is a motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor attachment member 1152. The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted has a left vertical plate portion 1184 so that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and passes through a hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151.

  The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1157. Thereby, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 at the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. The driven gear 1156 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11564 on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844.

  The left arm member 1155 is a member that is generally anti-C-shaped (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front, has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the upper end on the paper surface), and the other end. The left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the portion (the end on the lower side of the drawing). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

  The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 that protrudes forward at one end (left side), and has a long hole 11542 at the other end (center side). A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 includes a left arm bearing 11548 that is rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 rotates in the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (arc movement) about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a center of rotation. It is pivotally supported. In addition, a coil spring 1153 is externally attached to the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (left rotation direction).

  The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Among these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as right drive transmission members that transmit power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view, and in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one end (right side) of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the installation region of the right drive transmission member.

  The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor attachment member 1162. The right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached is formed on the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through the hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

  The driven gear 1166 meshes with the drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1167. Thereby, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 at the center and a support shaft 1162 spaced from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1166 is rotatably supported by the bearing 11664 on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864.

  The right arm member 1165 is a substantially C-shaped member (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front. The right arm support shaft 11654 is provided at the portion (the end on the lower side of the drawing). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 1162 of the driven gear 1166.

  The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 that protrudes forward at one end (right side), and has a long hole 11642 at the other end (center side). A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 includes a right arm bearing 11648 that is rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 rotates around the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 in the installation region of the right drive transmission member 11868 so that the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 can rotate (arc motion). It is pivotally supported. In addition, a coil spring 1163 is externally attached to the hollow shaft 11644 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (in the right rotation direction).

  In this way, the movable decorative body 1110 is supported from the left and right sides by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164, and the power from the left motor 1154 and right motor 1161 is the left drive transmission member and right drive transmission member described above. Is communicating through.

  The pantograph mechanism 1170 includes a left upper arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 has a substantially rhombus side formed by four arms, a left upper arm 1172, a left lower arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a right lower arm 1178, and deforms the shape of the substantially rhombus (left upper arm 1172). And an angle formed by the left lower arm 1174 (an angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the right lower arm 1178) is changed. The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

  The “substantially rhombus shape” includes, for example, two pairs of arms that are parallel to each other among the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178 (for example, the upper left arm). 4 arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length. Cases of shapes and squares are also envisaged. Of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two sets of facing arms have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right portion The arms 1176 may or may not be the same length. Further, for example, one of the two opposing arms has the same length and the other arm. Different lengths may be used. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be employed. Further, considering that each arm, that is, an accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120). It may be in a form in which the arms facing each other change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state in accordance with the driving, or a form in which the arms change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned “arms facing each other in parallel”, it may be difficult to obtain complete parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Since it is assumed, it is considered to be parallel (substantially parallel) if the inclination directions of the arms facing each other are in the same direction. Even if each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, the operation limit position from the origin position). The lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be variously changed.

  The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and has a bearing 11722 at the center end, The part has a bearing 11724. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported on the left support shaft 11882.

  The left lower arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and the left end has a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the long portion. An extending portion 11741 extending upward (upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extending portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. In addition, a hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the center end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting a bearing 11724 on a support shaft 11742. The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position at which the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are both horizontal, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 65). Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged side by side substantially in parallel without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 (portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thereby, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. The hollow shaft 11744 passes through the long hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11224. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

  The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane that is substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The portion has a bearing 11764. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported on the right support shaft 11884.

  The lower right arm 1178 is a horizontally long flat plate that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and extends along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The right end of the right lower arm 1178 is located above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion. An extending portion 11781 extending upward (to the right lower arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extending portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The extending portion 11781 is provided with a support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. Further, a hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the center side end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by a bearing 11764 that is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other at the origin position (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are both in a horizontal state, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 65). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thereby, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161. The hollow shaft 11784 passes through the long hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

  In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 have been described as having the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 disposed on substantially the same plane as viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship between 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

  In the upper left arm 1172, the forefront position in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F1, and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion is B1 (see FIGS. 69B and 70B). reference). In the lower left arm 1174, the forefront position in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F2, and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 69B and 70B). ). Here, the forefront position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the forefront position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174. However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is the rearmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172). That is, when the left upper arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section perpendicularly crossing the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174, the thickness portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (Positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side).

  In the present embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are disposed on substantially the same plane as viewed from the side, but in detail, more than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be slightly positioned on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the forefront position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of 1172 in the front-rear direction is positioned rearward of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction The position B2 is configured to be positioned behind the forefront position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and ahead of the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. Instead, the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is the upper left arm. The rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 is positioned rearward of the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of 172, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 is greater than the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176. The rearmost position of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the front-rear direction of the long portion of the left lower arm 1174 (The last surface position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 is the foremost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the longitudinal position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction) You may comprise so that it may be located in the same plane.

  In the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 is rearward of the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal position of the upper left arm 1172. Positioned in front of the last surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the portion (between the foremost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and the last surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172) doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the frontmost arm to the position of the rearmost arm of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174) As long as the thickness can be reduced, the position of the last surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the last surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush. The forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush. Furthermore, the position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction are substantially flush with each other. The forefront position in the front-rear direction and the forefront position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may do it.

  Note that the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are moved in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. The thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 from the frontmost position to the rearmost position in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When a pachinko gaming machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is limited. Objects can be arranged, and a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of objects overlapping in the front-rear direction can be executed.

  In the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extending portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes a substantially horizontal state. Similarly, since the extending portion 11781 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. Since the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed, the movable range by the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and right lower arm 1178) can be further increased. Become. Moreover, since each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be made thick, the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is increased, and stability during operation is brought about. Furthermore, it becomes possible to increase the strength of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178, thereby increasing the size of the movable accessory that operates in accordance with the operation of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178. And a more dynamic movable effect can be executed.

  As described above, the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) is as described above. It is possible to execute the dynamic movable effect used and the dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect.

  The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface, and openings 1101 and 1105 are formed at positions that are substantially symmetrical. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can slide up and down by the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160 together with the covering decorative body 1120. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, a long hole 11104, a hole 11106 and a long hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The hole 11102 and the hole 11106 are holes provided at positions that are substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and are elongated elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1110. In addition, the movable decorative body 1110 is provided with an LED substrate 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to emit light according to the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

  The covering decoration body 1120 includes a covering decoration body 1122 disposed on the left side of the movable decoration body 1110 and a covering decoration body 1124 disposed on the right side of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decorative body 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decorative body 1124 includes a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

  In the covering decorative body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported in the hole 11102 of the movable decorative body 1110, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration body 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, the covering decoration body 1122 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at an end portion on the center side of the left lower arm 1174). Thereby, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is disposed so as to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11222 as a rotation center.

  In the covering decorative body 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported in the hole 11106 of the movable decorative body 1110, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration body 1124 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, the covering decoration body 1124 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at an end portion on the center side of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covered decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is disposed so as to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11242.

  In addition, the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 are arrange | positioned so that it may become substantially left-right symmetric with respect to each other.

[Explanation of the operation of the upper back part 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back surface accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 71A and 71B are diagrams showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (the mode at the origin position) before the operation starts, in which FIG. 71A is a front view and FIG. 71B is a rear view. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a mode before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position after the upper back surface actor 1100 starts to operate. Is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. FIGS. 73A and 73B are diagrams showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit positions, where FIG. 73A is a front view and FIG. 73B is a rear view. . In FIG. 74, after the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are movable decorations. It is a figure which shows an example when the body 1110 act | operates toward the paper surface lower side (when the covering decoration body 1120 starts an action | operation with respect to the movable decoration body 1110), Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B ) Is a rear view. FIGS. 75A and 75B are diagrams showing an example of a state in which the covering decorative body 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, where FIG. 75A is a front view and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 71, when the upper back surface 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is closed (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all substantially horizontal). is there. Here, regarding the members (the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 The members (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to conceal with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members. Thereby, there is little possibility that visual recognition of the image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is less likely to be noticed by the player.

  Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by increases. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates toward the lower side of the drawing, the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 is directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain positioned on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the paper surface when it is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It rotates around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844) clockwise. When the support shaft 11562 rotates around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear attachment shaft 11844) in the clockwise direction, the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down to the lower left, a clockwise pressing force with the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) as the rotation center acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 moves in the elongated hole 11542 and moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward.

  When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 1162 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the paper surface. When the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( Rotate counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 1162 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down to the lower right, a counterclockwise pressing force with the hollow shaft 11644 (the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868) as the rotation center acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves in the elongated hole 11642 and moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward.

  When the movable ornament 1110 moves downward, the cover ornaments 1122 and 1124 also move downward accompanying the movement of the movable ornament 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224 and 11244 of the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104 and 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward, the gravity This is because the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 also move downward due to the action.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are maintained in a substantially horizontal state while maintaining the substantially horizontal state. Operates downward.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward in the drawing, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves downward in the drawing. Pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward on the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 is pushed downward on the paper surface. It is done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 11782 and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884). In this way, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

  By the way, when the left upper arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, it eventually contacts the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (the center right support shaft 11884), the right upper arm 1176 eventually contacts the right contact surface 1194 of the restriction member 1190. The upper left arm 1172 is an operation limit position in which the position when contacting the left contact surface 1192 is directed downward in the drawing, and the upper right arm 1176 is positioned when contacting the right contact surface 1194. The operation limit position is directed downward.

  After the left upper arm 1172 moves to the operation limit position, when the left motor 1151 further rotates counterclockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 Move from the lower end position toward the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1122 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 further rotates clockwise in front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 has the elongated hole 11108. It moves from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. Thus, the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 operate together with the movable decoration body 1110 from the origin position toward the lower side of the drawing, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move toward the lower side of the drawing. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates to the limit position and further moves downward in the drawing, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by the player. The exposure amount of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative operating range of the covering decorative body 1120 with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

  As described above, the upper back surface accessory 1100 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 71) and the descending end position (see FIG. 73). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 can move between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Can be moved. The operating limit position is that the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move to the lower end position, and then the movable decorative body 1110 is at the lower end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. The activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they are waiting at a position that does not hinder the viewing of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is in the lowered end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covered decorative body 1120 is in the operation limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back surface 1100 at the origin position moves toward the descending end position, the upper back surface 1100 (the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It will advance to the front. The advancement of the upper back actor 1100 from the origin position toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 advances the game (for example, the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 ) Is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed under the condition of).

  When the upper back part 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed to positions that can be seen by the player. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of a transparent resin, it does not hinder the viewing of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is moved up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm The fulcrum with the part arm 1174 is on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is not likely to obstruct the player's visual recognition (the player tends to watch the center part), as well as the left drive mechanism. 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be provided compactly in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back surface accessory 1100. Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper back part 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are less likely to enter the player's view. Further, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the thickness of the upper back part 1100 as a whole (in this embodiment, the thickness of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 is approximately equal to the width). ing).

  In addition, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts operating, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 start to operate from the origin position, and the decorative decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body) is moved to the movable decorative body 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will start to operate relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts to operate, the covering decorative body 1120 does not operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 performs an operation that exceeds the player's expectation from the middle, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

  In this embodiment, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124) is not operated with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and is movable from the middle. The cover decoration body 1120 is configured to start operation relative to the decoration body 1110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover decoration body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decoration body 1110. It may be.

  By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even so, the posture of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the direction in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are directed) does not change. On the other hand, for the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left abutment surface 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, respectively, The longitudinal portions of the arms 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122). And the covering decorative body 1124) are operated relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. The right lower arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be seen in front view. At that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relatively upward with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm The arm 1178 is positioned on the back side of the covering decorative body 1120. When the covering decoration body 1120 is operated relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the accessory area (area combining the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120) that can be visually recognized in front view becomes large. By doing so, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are prevented from being exposed in a natural manner without any sense of incongruity for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back surface actor 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the lowered end position, the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are respectively left contact surfaces. When abutting on 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 continues to operate toward the lowered end position, and the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body). The body 1124) operates upward. Here, the operation of the covering decorative body 1122 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise in front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decorative body 1124 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise in front view. That is, for each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the motors corresponding to the respective elements (the left motor 1151 for the covering decoration body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covering decoration body 1124) are simply rotated in a specific direction. With one simple operation control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. In addition, since both the cover decoration body 1122 and the cover decoration body 1124 each rotate only one motor, the movable decoration body 1100 can be operated while the operation of the movable decoration body 1100 is continued with a simple configuration and space saving. It becomes possible to operate independently of the operation. In particular, in recent years, it has become a mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and to arrange a plurality of movable accessories, so that the contribution to space saving is a significant effect.

  By the way, conventionally, when operating an accessory in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, a drive mechanism is provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performs a linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and a large area is required to install the drive mechanism. Space saving can be achieved if the accessory can be operated by the arc motion, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by the arc motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves in the long hole 11542. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. In synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves within the elongated hole 11642. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 performs an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum, while maintaining the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 substantially horizontal, The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc motion, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanisms (the left drive mechanism 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration body 1110 is defined as the movable decoration body 1110. The operating range can be made smaller than that, which can greatly contribute to space saving.

  In the present embodiment, the movable ornament 1110, the covering ornament 1120, the ornament cover 1130, the ornament cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static ornament 1196 have the same type of ornament on the front surface. Is given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that recalls the same idea, and the same idea can be recalled if a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, and shape is applied. In the present embodiment, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196, and 1196 have the same appearance in appearance and form that forms the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). The decoration is recognizable. Moreover, since the upper back part 1100 has a character shape related to the concept of the gaming machine, it is the same by the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 with the same type of decoration on the front side. A character shape is formed.

  In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (left transmission of the present embodiment). As for the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), there is a possibility that the movable accessory can be seen in front view when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this regard, in this embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible in front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110). The player is recognized as a member constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100) together with the covering ornament 1120, the ornament covers 1130 and 1140, and the static ornament 1196). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members no matter where the movable decorative body 1110 is located between the origin position and the operation limit position by the operation (for example, FIG. 71 to FIG. 75 (see (A)). More specifically, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated to provide continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 has a movable decorative body 1110 and a decorative cover. The decoration which gives continuity between 1140 is given. Moreover, the same type of decoration is applied to the front surfaces of the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164 and the other members to form one character. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible in front view, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member to be played. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, whereas the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped to image the corners of the eyes from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. . For this reason, it seems that it is even more difficult for the player to grasp that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members that drive the movable decorative body 1110.

[Composition of lower part 1200]
The structure of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. 76 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position). FIG. 77 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 78 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as seen obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 79 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 80 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 81 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixed base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member for guiding the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an auxiliary for applying an upward biasing force to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moving up and down Lower arm driving motor 1230 as a driving source for operating arm 1280, lower accessory moving decorative body 1210 with respect to lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the power of lower accessory driving motor 1230 are movable in the lower tool A gear 1240 for transmitting to the decorative body 1210 and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 disposed behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of a transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 77 and 79 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an operating mechanism that moves the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

  The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory driving motor 1230 is attached to a substantially lower center of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 on the front side. A support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to face forward. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to face rearward. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 which are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outwardly above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. Is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is disposed on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory driving motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 is at the origin position.

  The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the lateral direction. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so that the lower accessory fixing base 1220 can operate in the vertical direction. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of a transparent resin that can be operated in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. And a lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that moves up and down together with the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to transmit light from the rear toward the front.

  A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are elongated holes that are long in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

  Further, the lower accessory movable base 12102 is mounted on the front side with an LED substrate on which LEDs (not shown) as light emitting sources are arranged. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decoration cover 12104. Thereby, for example, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

  The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12604 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixed base 1220. A groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

  The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixed base 1220. The groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

  The auxiliary arm 1280 is a bar-like member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 supported on the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 at the left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 is formed with a long hole 12802 that engages with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 at the right end.

  An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between a support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and a bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (counterclockwise direction) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 is assisted by the counterclockwise biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290.

  The lower accessory driving motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

  The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404, and a right driven gear 12406.

  The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the left and right. They are arranged side by side. Also, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

  The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a at the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a at the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the rotation of the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotates in synchronization.

  The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface thereof at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center of the left driven gear 12404. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center of the right driven gear 12406. The distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

  Note that “the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter”, “the height direction position of the center of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the height direction position of the center of the right driven gear 12406” and “the left driven gear. “The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same” are not so precise that it is required to have the same value after the decimal point. In addition, when the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is transmitted to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stably maintained with a good balance in the left-right direction while maintaining the same appearance. What is necessary is just to be in the range in which a colleague is transmitted substantially equally to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

  The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12405 rotates around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

  The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12407 rotates around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

  In a normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are each located at the lowermost lowermost position (position shown in FIG. 82).

  Note that the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 also have a function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

  When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is the uppermost position, both the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 are at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. The bosses 12405 and 12407 need to be formed so as to be able to move between them. In the present embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 82) to a position exceeding the uppermost position in the clockwise direction. Further, the hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 82) counterclockwise to a position exceeding the uppermost position.

  Here, among the two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost end position of the boss 12405 and the lower side is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Of the two positions where the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost position of the boss 12407 and the lower side is the lowermost position of the boss 12407 (whichever (See also FIG. 84). However, in FIG. 84, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position.

  Note that the “position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position” for the boss 12405 is the right side in the front view (on the right side of FIG. 84A, FIG. 84) of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404. The left side of (B) is a position where the substantially uppermost end position can be maintained. Further, the “position exceeding the uppermost end position” of the boss 12407 means the left side in front view (on the left side in FIG. 84A, FIG. 84B in the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406). ) Right side). However, it is preferable that the degree of “exceeding position” is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has moved down when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost end position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends to a position lower than the uppermost end position.

[Description of operation of lower actor 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 82A and 82B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the operation is started, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), in which FIG. 82A is a front view and FIG. FIGS. 83A and 83B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, in which FIG. 83A is a front view and FIG. 83B is a rear view. FIG. 84 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operating up to the operating limit, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. In FIG. 84, the bosses 12407 and the long holes 12108 are illustrated so as to be able to grasp them.

  The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 82) and the operation limit position (see FIG. 84). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is in the operation limit position, it is positioned in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is directed forward from the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance. The advancement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 advances the game (for example, a game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752). This is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed on the condition that the ball is won (passed).

  When the lower accessory driving motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405 positioned at the lowermost position in the normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Move to rotate. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the lowermost boss 12407 in the normal state is countered while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 82) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 ( The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the right direction in FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B). The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving in the right direction (leftward in FIGS. 82B and 83B) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively. 12406 (rotation range of 12406).

  Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 moves in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the right direction (leftward in FIGS. 83B and 84B), and the boss 12407 is a long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the left direction (the right direction in FIGS. 83B and 84B). The auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280. Therefore, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force to push the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

  When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. That is, the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 is lowered toward the origin position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the right direction in FIGS. 83 (B) and 84 (B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 passes through the long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward while moving in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 83B and 84B). While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the origin position (see FIG. 82), the boss 12405 moves to the right in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward while moving in the direction (leftward in FIGS. 82B and 83B), and the boss 12407 is in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Is moved leftward (rightward in FIGS. 82B and 83B) and the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward.

  As described above, the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The diameter is the same. Further, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory driving motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the lower accessory movable base 12102 is mounted with the LED substrate, the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 to be lifted has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory that is long in the left-right direction. When such an accessory is raised, there is a possibility that power is transmitted to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be lifted is somewhat heavy or an accessory that is long in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 is The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stabilized (with a good balance in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture at the origin position (see FIG. 82) without power being transmitted to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

  By the way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is operated from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is required to operate the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so as to rotate more than the proper rotational speed (so as to rotate beyond the operation limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 started to operate by the rotation of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is physically caused by the boss 12405 colliding with the end portion of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 colliding with the end portion of the hole 12206. Stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

  Here, the hole 12204 is formed from the center of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 to the center side (the right side of the paper in FIG. 84A from the vertical line LL). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed to the center side of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 84A from the vertical direction line LR). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the drawing in FIG. 84A with respect to the vertical direction line LL), and the center of the right driven gear 12406 is The boss 12407 is positioned more centrally than on the line of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the drawing in FIG. 84A with respect to the vertical line LL).

  When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) with respect to the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 , The rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is restricted by the holes 12204 and 12206. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in either direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

  As described above, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not drop due to gravity, and of course, external vibration such as vibration is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend and is held at the operation limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). Accordingly, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. It becomes possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward.

  If boss 12405 is not on the left side of vertical line LL passing through center OL of left driven gear 12404 (if boss 12407 is not on the right side of line of vertical direction LR passing through center OR of right driven gear 12406) The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 toward is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is the rotation direction of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406) (at the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 is horizontally left and right in the front view). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 Although the rotation is restricted, this is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) is to be held at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The movement range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment is to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position rotated 90 degrees further to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 84A and the left side in FIG. 84B) than on the vertical line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side in the front view (the left side in FIG. 84A and the right side in FIG. 84B) from the vertical direction line LR, The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to rotate the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, so that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) Is moved up and down, however, the mode in which the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down is not limited to this, and a force acting member (this embodiment) that applies force to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 The form bosses 12405 and 12407 are equivalent to each other as long as the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down by moving in an arc. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for moving the force acting member, for example, the above-described portion is located at a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center. You may use the rotation member etc. in which the force action member was formed.

  Further, the force acting member (equivalent to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in the present embodiment) can be moved while drawing a perfect arc when using a gear, but is not necessarily moved while drawing a perfect arc. It is not necessary, and it may be moved by drawing an arc of an ellipse. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetric character (the lower character movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, the lower character movable) The component of the load corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, as long as the driving source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target accessory descends, a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism Thus, in the series of operations for moving the target combination upward, the target combination can be locked upward.

  In this embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the driving of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, 12204 and 12206 are physically stopped. For example, when the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment) is stopped above by the control of the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of this embodiment), it stops. There is a possibility that the rotation of the motor must be decelerated in the vicinity of the upper position to be caused, and the ascending speed of the target accessory in the vicinity of the upper position may be reduced. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in the present embodiment), the object character is selected unless the motor rotation is decelerated. It is possible to realize high-speed movement with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where it is desired to stop. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetric combination has a horizontally long shape, the target combination is maintained while maintaining the stability in the horizontal direction. The object can be raised and lowered.

  In the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor As long as 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner character 1300]
The corner accessory 1300 includes the upper corner accessory 1320 and the lower corner accessory 1350 as described above. Here, first, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described.

[Composition of upper corner character 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 86 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 87 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 88 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The upper corner combination 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner combination 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. And a photosensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  The fixed plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper side of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above, on the rear side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper rear accessory 1100. Support shafts 13222, 13224, and 13226 are formed on the front surface side of the fixed plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. A hole 13229 is formed in the upper half of the periphery of the support shaft 13226 around the support shaft 13226.

  The 1st movable body 1330 is provided with the decoration part 13302 to which decorations, such as a character, were given, and the arm part 13304 comprised integrally with the decoration part 13302. FIG. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed at the upper right of the bearing 13306 in front view. The first movable body 1330 is rotatable around a bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). In addition, a long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the movement direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The 2nd movable body 1340 is provided with the decoration part 13402 in which decorations, such as a character, were given, and the arm part 13404 comprised integrally with the decoration part 13402. FIG. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed at the upper left of the bearing 13406 in front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around a bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

  The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are engaged with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are engaged with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the gears 1334 and 1335. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the gears 1334 to 1336.

  The first gear 1334 has a hollow shaft 13342 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13342 is pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

  The second gear 1335 has a hollow shaft 13352 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224. In addition, a boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a position away from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward.

  The third gear 1336 has a hollow shaft 13362 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13226. In addition, a boss 13364 is formed on the front side of the third gear 1336 at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the center radially outward. On the back side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13366 is formed at a position away from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on the surfaces opposite to each other substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photosensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

  The first transmission arm 1337 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

  The second transmission arm 1338 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

  The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin positions (see FIG. 89 described later). ) So that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 90 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operation from the origin position. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is located. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are disposed behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 19), and thus are difficult to see in front view.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 89), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIGS. 89 to 92). , The first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

  When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) in the front view, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 87) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) in the front view. To go around. When the boss 13354 rotates around the hollow shaft 13352 clockwise as viewed from the front, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates around the support shaft 13224 clockwise as viewed from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 89 to 92) in front view. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in the front view, the support shaft 13308 moves to the fixed plate 1322. The formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, with the rotation center as a rotation center. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation. To the front).

  In addition, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 counterclockwise when viewed from the front center around the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13226). Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 13226 as the center of rotation, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 87) rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13362 as seen from the front. When the boss 13364 rotates around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 89 to 92) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably mounted on the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in a front view, the support shaft 13408 is moved to the fixed plate 1322. The formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view with the rotation center. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the rotation center.

  In this manner, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332.

  Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside of the field of view to the inside in the front view.

  When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in a direction to return to the origin position by the movement opposite to the above-described movement. To do.

  By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides with the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 is smoothly moved to the origin position. Recovery is possible.

[Configuration of Lower Corner Work 1350]
A configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 96 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from the upper left obliquely from the back.

  The lower corner combination 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner combination 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  The fixed plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is fixed to and attached to the lower side of the rear box 1800 on the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, and 13529 are formed on the front surface side of the fixed plate 1352. A hole 13530 is formed in the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 around the support shaft 13527.

  The third movable body 1355 includes a decoration portion 13552 that is decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 that is configured integrally with the decoration portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the center side end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is pivotally supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is biased clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force about the support shaft 13524 acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decoration part 13572 on which decorations such as characters are given, and an arm part 13574 configured integrally with the decoration part 13572. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the center side end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13529 on which the bearing 13576 is pivotally supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 biases counterclockwise about the support shaft 13529 as a center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force about the support shaft 13529 acts on the fourth movable body 1357. Further, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13577 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1354 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1352 via a motor attachment member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 13542.

  The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367, a third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of the third movable body 1355, and gears 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366 , 1367 and a fourth transmission arm 1372 for transmitting the power from all or part of the first movable body 1357 to the fourth movable body 1357.

  A hollow shaft 13612 is formed at the center of the first gear 1361. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13542.

  The power from the motor 1354 is transmitted in the order of the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at the center and a boss 13664 formed at a predetermined distance from the center radially outward. Further, the sixth gear 1366 is formed with a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photosensor 1375 on the front surface at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the center radially outward. Further, the seventh gear 1367 is formed with a hollow shaft 13672 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13528 so as to be rotatable, and a boss 13684 is formed at a portion that is separated from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward.

  The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

  The fourth transmission arm 1372 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 pivotally supports the boss 13694 so as to be rotatable.

  The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin positions (see FIG. 97 described later). ) Is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 98 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is positioned at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is the liquid crystal display device 16. Located in the lower right corner of the display area. Since the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are disposed behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550 at the origin position, it is difficult to visually recognize the front view.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 97), the motor 1354 rotates, and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (counterclockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99). The first gear 1361 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

  When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99) about the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as a center of rotation, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 95) is centered on the hollow shaft 13662. As a front view, it goes around counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 rotates around the hollow shaft 13666 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 97 to 99) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352 when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view. The support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated about the center of rotation in a clockwise direction in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

  Further, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 as viewed from the front, the boss 13684 (see FIG. 95) orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 as viewed from the front. When the boss 13672 rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 in the clockwise direction, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 97 to 99) in the front view. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13578 is moved to the fixed plate 1352. The formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, with the rotation center as a rotation center. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the rotation center.

  In this manner, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated in synchronization by the rotation of one motor 1354.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from an origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside of the field of view to the inside in the front view.

  When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the original position due to the movement opposite to the above-described movement. Operate.

  By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352 so that the third movable body 1355 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, with respect to the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13777 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 is smoothly moved to the origin position. Recovery is possible.

[Mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, a mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 100 is a back unit showing an aspect when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position in the corner accessory 1300. 176 is an example of a front view of FIG. FIG. 101 shows a case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. In FIG. 102, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. However, in FIGS. 100 to 102, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball 1600 is omitted.

  Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet) ) Is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 100, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 3), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  In this way, for example, the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201 controls the driving of the motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 87) and the motor 1354 (see, for example, FIG. 96) as a big hit determination process. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 have a single design (hereinafter referred to as “first design”). Or a single design (hereinafter referred to as “second design”) with some (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340). Forming a design (hereinafter referred to as “third design”) with some (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357). It is possible to or. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect due to the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of accessories.

  The design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit It is also possible for the player to recognize the information as a specific reach execution suggestion with high expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that causes the player to expect a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination by the start winning to the first start opening 5442 or the second start opening 440, the specific The idioms indicating (or relating to) the reach effect are two or more movable bodies (a first movable body 1330, a second movable body 1340, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body) in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It may be expressed by a design (for example, idiom) that can be recognized when any two or more of the movable bodies 1357 are arranged close to each other.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 come close to each other from the origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side in the front view.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from an origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side of the field of view toward the lower inner side in front view.

  Here, letters are given to the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively, but the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, respectively. Each single character given to each of 1357 does not make sense, and information related to the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

  In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all disposed at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively the upper left in the front view and the front. They are arranged at parts separated from the upper right of the view, the lower left of the front view and the lower right of the front view. Therefore, two or more of the one movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's field of view in a front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, idiom) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies to be operated. It can only be recognized after being stopped in the vicinity of the display area of the device 16.

  As described above, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in front view. By doing this, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the near side (movable character that has advanced in front of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thus, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without depending on the rendered image. Information relating to the progress of the game can be shown to the player only with the movable body. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the performance be changed, but an effect that has an impact on the player can be performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, and 1357, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the design is not necessarily limited thereto, and is attached to two or more of the movable bodies. One design may be formed only by letters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is formed only by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. The second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) formed as such are present as mere separate movable bodies without constituting a design.

  In the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Two or more characters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

  In the present embodiment, the characters attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are not limited thereto, but are limited to the liquid crystal. Any device may be used as long as it forms a design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, something that recalls a specific idea) in front of the display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). Although there is a gap between the movable body and another movable body, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in synchronization with each other by the rotation of one motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 87), and the third motor 1354 rotates by the rotation of one motor 1354. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body. Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Configuration of the side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. FIG. 103 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 104 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 106 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. In FIG. 104, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so that they can be easily seen, but in actuality, they are opaque members.

  The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450 for operating the movable decorative body 1450. Positions of a side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, a movable piece 1430 and an L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable ornament 1450, and the movable ornament 1450 And a photo sensor 1464 for confirming the above.

  The attachment plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the right side portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion on the front surface side of the mounting plate 1410. A movable decoration body support shaft 1414 that pivotally supports the movable decoration body 1450 is formed below the mounting plate 1410.

  The movable decorative body 1450 has a vertically long main body 1452 with a decoration on the front surface, and a single movable body configured to be operable with the main body 1452 as well as with respect to the main body 1452 alone. 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 below the main body portion 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is pivotally supported on the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 in the movable decorative bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable about the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative bearing 1458). The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that protrudes rearward on the right side when viewed from the front.

  The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444. The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

  The movable piece 1430 includes a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442 and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as the center of rotation.

  The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and that is long in the downward direction. And have. The link member 1420 is rotatable about a link support shaft 1412 supported by a link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece long hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the long hole direction of the movable piece long hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The second link 1425 is formed with a movable ornament body elongated hole 1426 to which the movable ornament boss 1455 of the movable ornament body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center.

  The photosensor 1464 is attached and fixed to the lower portion of the attachment plate 1410 via the photosensor attachment member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end portion of the movable decorative body 1450, and the photosensor 1464 has the above origin confirmation movable when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position. The piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of operation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104, and 107 to 111. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 108 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 109 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 110 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 111 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position at which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a “most advanced position”.

  The inclination degree of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 104) in the rear view, and the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one revolution, the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 (movable decorative body 1450). Is set to move from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

  In the most advanced position shown in FIG. 110, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426. This is because the rotational direction about the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different from each other. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (the surface in the longitudinal direction).

  When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (a position where the inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in the front view. When rotated counterclockwise in FIGS. 103, 107 and 109 and clockwise in FIGS. 104, 108, 110 and 111, the movable piece 1430 has the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise around the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece long hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 107 and counterclockwise in FIG. 108) in front view around the link support shaft 1412) acts. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in a front view, the force that pushes the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 through the movable decorative boss 1455 is generated. Works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

  The side accessory motor 1440 further rotates from the state where the inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110), and the motor output shaft 1442 is counterclockwise in the front view (FIGS. 103 and 107). 109 and 109, the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise around the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece long hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 107 and counterclockwise in FIG. 108) in front view around the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation, a force to return the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position acts on the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455. To do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 104) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

  As described above, the movable decorative body can be obtained by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (in the present embodiment, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) without causing the side accessory motor 1440 to rotate forward or reverse. 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 104) to approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1 in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view to approximately 4:30 in the rear view. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 to 1 o'clock in the rear view.

  Therefore, not only when the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also from the origin position to the most advanced position unless the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 varies greatly. The movable decorative body 1450 moves relatively quickly, and the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position relatively slowly. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body effect) is a hit determination performed when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. Although it is performed based on the result, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quick movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (same direction), but the movable decorative body The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making the angle smaller than the angle, the moving decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It becomes possible to move quickly.

  The single movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By causing the 1454 to operate together with the main body 1452, the operation effect of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is on standby between the origin position, the most advanced position, or the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independent body 1454 is attached to the main body 1452. You may make it operate.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The structure of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. 114A is an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and FIG. 114B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C shown in FIG.

  The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel attachment case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are attached, an LED substrate 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, an inner A lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the above-described opening window 1552, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

  Panel attachment case 1556 is a case-like member that is fixedly attached to the lower right portion of rear box 1800 of back unit 176 described above.

  The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-like member on which an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the above-described opening window 1552 is formed and has a planar region 1563. On the LED substrate 1560, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged on the radially inner side of the annular protrusion 1561, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the planar region 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light toward the outer side in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

  The light guide lens 1570 is provided so as to accommodate the LED substrate 1560 with the panel attachment case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting light in a planar shape. The light guide lens 1570 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 is black on the front side, and has a watermark on the back side. The watermark cannot be visually recognized from the front in normal times (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears on the panel cover 1590 when the LED 1562 and 1564 emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The black sheet 1580 has a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are arranged so as to face the opening window 1552 in this order from the front. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is disposed in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated inside in the radial direction (so as to be located outside the LED 1562 in the radial direction).

  The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 114B) that protrudes to the back side in front view along the outer periphery. Part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 toward the radially outer side is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the light that has not been absorbed passes through the inner lens 1583. The inner lens 1583 is divided into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 113). Each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of notches formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the peripheral portion toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the light intensity is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the central portion in the radial direction, but the surface of the inner lens 1583 is collected by collecting the incident light toward the central portion in the radial direction. It becomes possible to emit light more uniformly.

  The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet on which a picture such as a character is drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be viewed from the front by the half mirror 1585 under normal conditions (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but if the predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character is displayed in the area within the opening window 1552. Appears to emerge. Thus, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area within the window frame 1552. Therefore, in this specification, the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp.

  The window edge 1586 is gloss plated and is configured to reflect light. Further, the window edge 1586 is formed with the above-described opening window 1552, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

  The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and the black sheet 1580 is attached to the back side as described above. Further, the panel cover 1590 has a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted outward in the radial direction. A part of the light enters the flange 15832 (see FIG. 114) of the inner lens 1583, a part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light passes through the inner lens 1583 and has a diameter. Light is emitted toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 114) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586. The light reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586 is incident on the inner lens 1583 while changing the traveling direction of the light to the radially inward direction. In this way, light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since light is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, including the above-described part of light, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the surface can be uniformly formed. It is possible to emit light.

  Various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 115 shows a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power interruption detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power interruption detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and repeats the process of S12 until the power interruption detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption is detected, and the process proceeds to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process that waits until the sub control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing to clear the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / launch control circuit 300. . When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set on. The power interruption detection flag is a flag indicating that power interruption processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of power interruption. When the power interruption detection flag is set on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set off, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

  In step S <b> 18, the main CPU 101 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 103 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). When the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

  In step S <b> 20, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting for the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) at the time of restoration of power interruption (step S21).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

  In step S <b> 23, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 116 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, for example. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (step S32).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating various timer values (step S34).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S35).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved register values (step S37). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 117 shows switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a prize to the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passing detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts at the time of winning a prize winning 540 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired in accordance with the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Start-up winning detection processing]
FIG. 118 shows start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening prize detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472 (step S51). When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

  In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting payout information corresponding to the first start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first start winning prizes (the number of retained first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved is 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

  In step S <b> 54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a design random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the winning random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the big hit type determination table are referred to based on the random number value for winning determination and the random number value for winning. Then, a symbol designating command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for setting a command for increasing the number of retained first start opening prizes (step S58). The command for increasing the number of reserves for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol is incremented by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S59). When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S60. When no game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

  In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the second start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second start opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S62. When the number of reserved is 4, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening prize detection process.

  In step S <b> 62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second start opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a design random number value, and stores these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, and the hit random number determination table (second start port) and the symbol determination table (second With reference to the big hit type determination table, the symbol designating command, the winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and table pattern to determine the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a second start opening prize holding number increase command (step S66). The second start opening prize hold number increase command is a command to increase the hold number of the second special symbol by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening prize detection process.

[Variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 119 shows variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to a gaming state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a hit determination random number value, and a design random number value, which will be described later, and selects a variation pattern type. Is performed (step S71).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the first half and second half fluctuation patterns based on a predetermined lottery probability from among the selected fluctuation pattern types (step S72). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

  Since the variation pattern stores the variable symbol display time associated with the identification symbol, the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process is information that can substantially represent the variation time. It becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 120 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S81). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the power-on processing described above.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number update processing (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73) according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S 83 and S 84. A process of storing control signals for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display / display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 74). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display for the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage / game state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 121 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “08”) described in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 101 performs processing for loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. Based on the value of the read control state flag, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute processes in steps S92 to S100 described later. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. The main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S92 to S100. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S92). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved special symbols that are variably displayed, and if the number of reserved is not “0”. When there is a holding ball, the winning determination result obtained by the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol variable display time management process described later is set to be executed after the variable symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. The special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variable display time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a special state (to be described later) as a control state flag when the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process. A value ("02") indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that a special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit determination is made when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”) and the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result is “big hit” or “small hit”. When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag. The time corresponding to the big hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small win”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control status flag is a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a large winning opening opening process (step S96), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and also sets an opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the big opening opening timer. That is, this process is set so that a process for opening a special prize opening, which will be described later, is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined number when the control status flag is a value (“04”) indicating the big winning opening opening process, and the opening. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating a later-described extra winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97) in the control state flag, and sets the extra winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening set in step S97 has elapsed, it is set to execute the monitoring process for residual balls in the special winning opening described later. Note that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening opening process.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big prize opening (the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (the big hit end interval). Time) in the wait timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the big winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The number of times counter is updated so as to increase it by “1”. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the special winning opening to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, the process is set so that the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96) is executed again in this process. It should be noted that a display command indicating that the special winning opening is being opened is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the big prize opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the big opening number, the big hit end interval process is performed (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a value ("07") indicating that the control state flag indicates the jackpot end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("" when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed). 08 ") is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S99. When the above-mentioned winning selection symbol command is any one of “z5”, “z6”, “z7”, “z10” and “z11”, the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state to the probability changing gaming state. If the hit selection symbol command described above is one of “z0”, “z1”, “z2”, “z3”, “z4” and “z9”, the gaming state is changed. Control to change to non-probability game state. When the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (when the big hit determination random number value is “small hit determination value data”), the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended, or when “losing” is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of holdings (starting storage information) to be decreased by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control status flags to “00”, “01”, “ 02 ”and“ 08 ”in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). ) In this order at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control status flag to “00”, “01” when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”. , “02”, “03” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described process for opening the winning a prize opening (step S96), monitoring process for remaining balls in the winning a prize opening (step S57), and waiting time management process before reopening the winning a prize opening (step S98) in this order. A big hit game or a small hit game is executed at a predetermined timing.

  When the end condition for the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), the big hit end interval process (step S99), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 127 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 120 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in this embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 122 shows a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process (“00”) (step S112). When determining that the control state flag is not “00”, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the second start opening winning number is not “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S114. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S119.

  In step S <b> 114, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to variable display of the second special symbol during variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for winning determination, a design random number value, a determined variation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the second start port 440 It is.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second start opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management processing in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs big hit / small hit determination processing (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the start opening and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on the winning determination table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of the winning start port, determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines based on the acquired determination value data whether “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” has been won (win determination).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a variable display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S120. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S122.

  In step S <b> 120, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), special symbol game data (information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a winning determination random number value, a symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning the first start port 5442, a determined variation pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first start opening prize (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 123 shows the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time after variable display confirmation (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is “small hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “small hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S137. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “small hit”, that is, if the special symbol game is “missed”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S135.

  In step S <b> 135, the main CPU 101 performs time reduction number subtraction processing. The short time subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S136). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11), and sets the round number upper limit value (big winning opening release upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S143.

  In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the time reduction counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

[Time reduction subtraction processing]
FIG. 124 shows the time-saving subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter counts until the set time reduction count (in this embodiment, determined as one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100) is 0. It is a counter. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time reduction flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 125 shows the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating a big hit end interval process (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”) (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of the big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol end display command to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “hit” (step S166). When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

  In step S 167, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probable big hit (step S168). If it is a probable big hit, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. If it is not a probable big hit, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability variation flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time reduction flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of times (100 in this embodiment as an example) in the hour / count counter (step S172).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the value of the small hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time reduction subtraction process (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 126 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is “1” (step S183). When the value of the probability variation flag is “1”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. If the value of the probability variation flag is “0”, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 127 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 127 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. Stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the main CPU 101 performs processing for loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. Based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes in steps S192 to S196 described later. The normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of holdings of the variable symbol variable display, and the number of holdings is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating a later-described normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193) in the normal symbol control state flag, and the variation time determined in the current process. Is set to the waiting time timer. That is, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed by the process of step S192.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol variable display time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 indicates that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, and the normal symbol control state flag is described later when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time after determination (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed by the process of step S193.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and the waiting time after the determination set in the process of step S193 has passed. It is determined whether or not the determination result is “winning”. If the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a value (step S195) indicating a normal electric accessory release process described later (step S195). “03”) is set. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary electric accessory release process is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “win”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S194 that the result of the hit determination is “win”, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process, the main CPU 101 has received a predetermined number of winnings while the normal electric accessory 460 is open. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric combination 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric combination opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When the above one condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 3) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described normal symbol game end process (step S196) in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end processing, the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of holdings of the variable symbol variable display by “1”. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes a sub control circuit main process. The sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for clearing the counter value of the watch dog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is activated, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (timeout), the power interruption process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes a scenario pre-setting process, an effect determination process (secret A stage 2002), a prefetch effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004), a background change control process (high accuracy stage 2004), and the number of times the background change can be continuously performed. Judgment processing (high accuracy stage 2004), fluctuation scenario determination processing (high accuracy stage 2004), chance up control processing (high accuracy stage 2004), hold change determination processing (high accuracy stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It consists of subroutines such as effect control processing and character lamp effect control processing. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 134 to 165.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes voice control processing (step S208). In this processing, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the lamp control circuit 206 executes a lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the lamp 25 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating an effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S201 is completed, the processes in steps S202 to S210 are repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 129 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 after reception from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data is present when the command is received, and that the data is free from errors or missing.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all matters relating to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (whether there is a serif notice or the presence of the SU notice) as the production pattern. The content of the effect (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) that is selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another process that is made into a separate subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and then the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by an effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 130 shows command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained by the effect mode determination process and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and effect information stored in the directory buffer. This directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading a message stored in the directory buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 131 shows message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets a device (control circuits 204 to 207) to transmit based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting presence / absence of a system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs setting of stage information and each piece of effect information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). Thus, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, production information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direction table registration processing]
FIG. 132 shows directory table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message transmission processing]
FIG. 133 shows message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after completing the message transmission, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Production mode determination processing by sub CPU 201]
Next, details of the effect mode determination process (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. The production mode is formed with a characteristic for each of a plurality of production stages.

[Direction stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 134, the state transition of a some production stage is demonstrated. FIG. 134 is a block diagram illustrating an example of state transition of a plurality of gaming state stages.

  In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of the hit determination (hereinafter referred to as “hit determination”) performed as a process of the main CPU 101 when a game ball wins at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is relatively high. It is a low low probability state and a state without electric support (that is, a normal gaming state). If the performance state is the normal stage 2000, the player can grasp that the game state is a normal game state (low probability state).

  The high-accuracy stage 2004 is a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit determination is relatively high, and is a state with electric support. If the performance state is the high-accuracy stage 2004, the player can grasp that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

  Both the concealment A stage 2002 and the concealment B stage 2006 are high-probability gaming states that have a relatively high winning probability of winning a big hit and are in a state of having electric support, or a winning probability of winning a big hit is relatively low It is a low probability state and a state with electric support. In the concealment A stage 2002 and the concealment B stage 2006, the player cannot grasp or grasp whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the low probability state even when viewing the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the secret A stage 2002 is disclosed as to whether it is in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state based on the final result of the battle effect described later. . Also, since the character subtraction effect described later during the battle effect is a midway effect toward the final result of the battle effect, depending on whether it is the subtraction effect of the ally character or the enemy character, The player can be depressed.

  In the normal stage 2000 (low probability gaming state, no short time), if the 8R big hit (big hit that opens and closes the big winning opening 540 for 8 rounds) is drawn, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state stage is the secret A stage 2002 (high Transition to the specified number of electric supports in the probabilistic gaming state or the predetermined number of electric supports in the low probability gaming state). “With electric support” is a state in which a short-time game is executed, and “Without electric support” is a state in which a short-time game is not executed.

  In the concealment A stage 2002, if the result of the big hit determination is 5R big hit, or if the specified number of time-short games are digested in the high probability gaming state, the effect stage transitions to the high probability stage 2004. On the other hand, in the concealment A stage 2002, when the specified number of time-short games are digested in the low-probability gaming state, the transition to the normal stage 2000 is made. In the normal stage 2000, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the high accuracy stage 2004.

  In the high-accuracy stage 2004, when the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the effect stage transitions to the concealment A stage 2002. In the concealment A stage 2002, if the result of the big hit determination is 5R big hit, the effect stage transitions to the concealment B stage 2006. In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the effect stage transitions to the concealment A stage 2002. In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the big hit determination is 15R big hit, the effect stage transitions to the high accuracy stage 2004. In the high-accuracy stage 2004, when the result of the big hit determination is 5R big hit, the effect stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006. In the concealment B stage 2006, when the prescribed number of times is exhausted, the effect stage transitions to the normal stage 2000.

  The above-mentioned jackpot round number is an example. In the above description, the game state of the concealment A stage 2002 is changed when the result of the jackpot determination is 8R jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game is 5R jackpot or 15R jackpot The sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the big hit game, and may make a transition to the high-accuracy stage 2004 after the big hit ends.

  The concealment A stage 2002 may be higher in expectation of the high probability gaming state than the concealment B stage 2006, for example. Each of these concealment stages realizes a characteristic effect form. For example, in the concealment A stage 2002, a battle effect is performed in which a plurality of characters are divided into enemy teammates to win a battle.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the concealment A stage 2002. In FIG. 135, the teammate character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. The upper left part of the screen displays the type of friendly character currently fighting and the number of friendly characters (remaining number). The upper right part of the screen displays the type of enemy character currently fighting and the number of enemy characters. (Remaining number of people) is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 135, other information such as variable display information of the identification symbol and pending start memory number information may be displayed as appropriate.

  The above-mentioned battle performance is an effect that serves as an indicator of whether there is a high probability of being in a high-probability gaming state or a high probability of being in a low-probability gaming state in the concealment A stage 2002. Whether the game state is a high probability game state or a low probability game state is determined. For example, when the enemy group is annihilated, the high probability gaming state is determined, and when the friend group is annihilated, the low probability gaming state is determined. Therefore, the effect of the process until one of the enemy allies is annihilated becomes an index effect indicating which one of the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state is more likely. For example, if a subtraction effect that reduces the number of enemy groups is performed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that there is a high probability of being in a high-probability gaming state, and a subtraction effect that reduces the number of teammates is performed. Then, the player can be given an impression that there is a low possibility of being in a high probability state (high possibility of being in a low probability gaming state). In the concealment A stage 2002, a rough scenario of such a battle effect is determined in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts, and in the concealment A stage 2002, the scenario determined in advance is changed or corrected. The production will be advanced. In the following, the scenario effect selection process (secret A stage 2002) will be described.

  Further, for example, in the secret B stage 2006, a battle effect is performed in which the main character and the enemy character fight one-on-one among the teammate characters. When the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, an effect in which the hero character wins in the battle effect is executed. In the battle performance in the concealment B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone in which the enemy character can be surely defeated if the hero character attacks, and b) either the hero character or the enemy character performs the first strike. A production zone that does not know, c) a production zone in which the enemy character makes a first strike is prepared. In the secret B stage 2006, it is notified whether or not the high-probability gaming state is caused by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. For example, in the last variable display (the last variable display in the short-time gaming state (special symbol game) or the last variable display (special symbol game) in which it is concealed whether or not it is a high-probability gaming state) If the movable decorative body 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in a high probability gaming state, and if the movable decorative body 1040 does not fall, it is in a low probability gaming state. However, in the final variable display, a fall sign effect that makes the movable decorative body 1040 expect to fall may be performed. Further, when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the fall of the movable decorative body 1040, all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated. By operating to the limit position (see, for example, FIG. 100), it is notified that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit.

  Further, in the concealment B stage 2006, transition is made between the zones of the production zones (i) to (c) described above according to the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the special symbol game is executed in the production zone of the above a) when the number of executions of the special symbol game is 1 to 10 times, and stays in the production zone of the above b) between 11 and 90 times. Then, during the 91st to 99th time, the player stays in the production zone of c), and in the 100th special symbol game, an effect indicating that the game is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. Needless to say, the performance at the secret B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the index effect can indicate which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is high in the concealment A stage 2002, but is not limited to this. It can also be adopted for other effects that indicate the degree of height. For example, although the above-described index effects can be employed for the following effects, it goes without saying that the following effects are merely examples and can be employed for other effects.
-Although it is disclosed that the high-probability gaming state is disclosed, when the duration of the high-probability gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long) Demonstrate the degree).
-Although it is disclosed that the short-time gaming state is disclosed, when the duration of the short-time gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (the expectation that the duration is long) Directing).
An effect indicating the degree of expectation that an effect section is set for one or a plurality of start memories and a reach variation effect or a big hit is included in the start memories included in the effect section.

  Note that the degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a jackpot of each notice effect or a high probability game state is the “big hit” or “high probability game state” when each notice effect is executed. The probability of becoming a “big hit” or “high probability gaming state” when each notice effect is executed, and the probability that each notice effect is executed as “out of play” or “low probability game state”. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of becoming an internal state (that is, an unfavorable state). However, since the “expected degree” may include a case where the expected degree is 100% and a case where the expected degree is 0%, strictly speaking, there is a case where the above-mentioned division is not established (for example, the production is performed) In this case, it may not be appropriate to divide 1 by 0 since it may include a case where a game state or a win is definitely notified, and in this case, a concept of 100%, 0%, or presence / absence as an expectation is included. Will be.)

[Scenario effect selection process (secret A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting, from the number of participating characters, the character that lost in the battle of the enemy ally, and deletes the lost character from the screen. An effect form related to the concealment A stage 2002 will be described more specifically.

  The processing for the production mode includes a step of determining the scenario production in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game), and when the concealment A stage 2002 starts, In accordance with the production selected based on the scenario, the scenario is changed and corrected. The “scenario” is a development of the time at which the character is subtracted during the progress (number of times reduced) of the game in the concealment A stage 2002. Since the “scenario” includes correspondence between the number of time reductions and character subtraction, it may be rephrased as an “effect map”. When the concealment A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances the character subtraction process by executing the determined scenario.

  The sub CPU 201 determines a team configuration and a scenario in advance because of the property that the production of the secret A stage 2002 is a team battle. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to the combination of the team's attribute, the expectation level of the high probability game, and the number of time reductions. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of scenario pre-setting processing. The sub CPU 201 executes this flowchart repeatedly at a predetermined timing as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the big hit determination process is 8R big hit, it executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 136. According to FIG. 134, it can be seen that the transition from the stage other than the concealment A stage 2002 to the concealment A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the big hit determination process being 8R big hit.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 136 when the result of the jackpot determination process is 8R jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of the jackpot determination process is not limited to this. The scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 136 may be executed when the jackpot is other than 8R.

  The sub CPU 201 draws a parameter indicating the expectation degree of the high probability game in the concealment A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, and A has the lowest probability of expected change. B has a high probability of expected variation, and C has a large expected probability of variation. D corresponds to the determination of the high probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameters in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 7).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a character appearance order in the concealment A stage 2002, that is, a battle participation order, for each enemy ally (step S302). The appearance order of the character ROM selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203. Note that, when the information on the appearance order is lost from the work RAM due to power interruption, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-on-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, the “specific character” that is confronted on a one-to-one basis may be set to a character that confronts one-on-one when a normal effect is executed without causing an electrical interruption. For example, the mode of the battle production selected by the lottery is a battle production between the “hero character + α” ally group and the “hero rival character + β” enemy group, and finally the hero character and the hero. When the information is lost due to a power interruption, the sub CPU 201 does not perform an effect in which α and β confront each other, and the main character's character and the main character's rival. It can be controlled so that a confrontation with a character is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a combination of the numbers of teammate characters and enemy characters (2 × 2, 6 × 5, etc.) (step S304). Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the aforementioned effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the team of friends and the enemy team. The team attributes may be determined by the probability variation parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the probability variation parameter, the combination, and the number of time reductions. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attribute, determines the pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

  FIG. 137 shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (the pattern value is 4 in the example of FIG. 137) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns the effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. A plurality of pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 refers to the table and determines a pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100. In determining the pattern value, the sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the combination with the expectation parameter, and thus can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. 2102 can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the production map 2102 is composed of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110. The small map 2110 has a predetermined number (for example, 6) of time reduction times as one unit in the concealment A stage 2002, From the number of enemy friendly characters to be subtracted within the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each enemy friend) and the variable display number of the variable display number, information on which subtraction processing is to be performed Composed. “Friend-1” indicates that “1” is subtracted from the friend character. “Friend-0” indicates that the friend character is not subtracted. “Enemy-1” indicates that “1” is subtracted from the enemy character. “Enemy 0” indicates that the enemy character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the specified number of times (number of time reductions).

  FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of the effect map 2102 used for the scenario lottery. In the present embodiment, the effect map 2102 includes a plurality of portions, for example, two combinations of a first half map and a second half map, and the sub CPU 201 has, for example, the same pattern value using the pattern value as a key. The first half map and the second half map are respectively selected (steps S306 and S308), and these are combined to form the entire production map 2102. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters corresponding to the number of people combination is subtracted uniformly over the entire short-time gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a “subtraction effect”.

  When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall effect map, the sub-map 2110 in which at least one character is subtracted from among the small maps 2110 included in the overall effect map, which character ( It is determined based on the lottery table whether to perform subtraction processing (subtraction effect) of the teammate character or enemy character (step S310). The sub CPU 201 records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM by combining the time reduction number and character information for performing the subtraction process with the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the contents of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in the work RAM.

  A mode in which the probability variation parameter, the number of time reductions, and the number of people are combined is as shown in FIG. The range of this mode is defined as a table for each category of low, medium, high, and definite expectations for high probability games in the secret A stage. FIG. 138 shows an example in which the first half map and the second half map are applied to this mode.

  If the table does not have a pattern in which the probability variation parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302) are combined, the sub CPU 201 determines that the probability variation parameter is “D” and the combination of the number of people is determined as the confirmation category. In the case other than the given mode (2 × 2, etc.), any one of A to C, which is a probability variation parameter other than D, may be selected again. The sub CPU 201 may prioritize the probability variation parameter and change the number of people combination by re-lotting.

  The sub CPU 201 indicates that the specific character A appearing at the end of the ally team and the specific character B appearing at the end of the enemy team are displayed on the effect map 2102 in order to reduce either of them at the end of the number of time reductions. It is possible not to include the subtraction processing information. For example, if the combination of the number of people is 6 × 4 (6 friends and 4 enemies), it can be reduced to 5 friends and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes a character to appear at the start of the concealment A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but the combination of the number of people and the number of characters to be displayed may not be matched. For example, if the enemy team includes a specific character, assuming that the specific character appears in the final variable display without participating in the battle, the number of friendly characters displayed when entering the concealment A stage 2002 is one less. In addition, the specific character can be prevented from being included in the effect map 2102 as a target of the subtraction process.

  When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secret A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation regarding the high-probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002 is suggested. Thus, the scenario pre-setting process by the sub CPU 201 ends.

  Next, processing for effect determination in the concealment A stage 2002 will be described. In the concealment A stage 2002, subtraction of the enemy ally character determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) according to the performance mode determined for each short time of the short time game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, various scenarios are developed in accordance with the game result in the secret A stage 2002. In the initially determined scenario, the character subtraction process is performed uniformly over the entire number of time reductions, and the sub CPU 201 performs a universal operation in the effect mode determination process in the concealment A stage 2002. By adjusting the scenario within a range that does not impair the story of the character subtraction process that is executed without interruption, the player can enjoy the diversity of scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story decided before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 Can make you conscious.

  Further, in the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 straddles the display of the hold information (start-up storage information) and the digestion of the plurality of hold-up start-up memories while not displaying the time reduction information on the liquid crystal display device. By executing the scenario, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the state in which a series of scenarios are continuously developed during the period of the concealment A stage 2002 without being aware of the hold information and the number of time reductions. it can.

  In the present specification, the start-up memory that is reserved may be simply referred to as “hold”. Further, the variable display of the identification symbol for the suspended start-up memory is referred to as “suspended digestion”. Furthermore, the start memory based on the winning at the first start port 5442 and the start memory based on the winning at the second start port 440 can be held up to four each, and these four holds are respectively stored in the first. The hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold are referred to, and the hold digestion is performed in this order.

  In the concealment A stage 2002, in order to develop the scenario production in a variety of ways according to the mode of the presentation determined for each short time, temporary fluctuations determined for each start memory within the range of the scenario production target ( (Variable display corresponding to one start-up memory) is converted into one or a plurality of blocks, and an effect can be set for each block. For the sake of convenience, this change is hereinafter referred to as “temporary change” in the sense that this change is different from the variable display of holding.

  FIG. 139 is an example showing the setting of the temporary variation for each hold from the first hold to the fourth hold along with the time sequence. Assuming that four holds are recorded, the sub CPU 201 displays the variable display during the use of the hold. Set the number of provisional changes according to the time. For example, when the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 1. When the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 2. When the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations. : 3 is set. In this embodiment, the selection ratio between the variable display time 3.5 seconds, the variable display time 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time 11.5 seconds is 1: 1, but this selection ratio is changed as appropriate. You may do it.

  According to FIG. 139, when the variable display time of the first hold is 3.5 seconds, the temporary variation is set to 4.0 seconds, which is a total of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds). When the variable display time of the second hold is 7.5 seconds, the first temporary variation is 4.0 seconds, the second temporary variation is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is added up. When 4.0 seconds is set and the third hold variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the first and second temporary fluctuations are 4.0 seconds, and the third temporary fluctuation is 3.5 seconds. And the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds, and when the fourth hold variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the temporary fluctuation is 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0. 5 seconds) is set to 4.0 seconds. The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional variation is to use this period for the rendering process. FIG. 139 shows that the temporary variation number is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary temporary variation number for the variation pattern. You can also Further, the sub CPU 201 can set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value, and the temporary fluctuation fluctuation time may not include an interval period. From the viewpoint of making the player aware that this is not an effect, it is preferable to include the interval time in the fluctuation time of the temporary fluctuation.

  Next, the process of determining the effect in the concealment A stage 2002 will be specifically described based on the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (secret A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the effect stage flag and checks whether or not it is the secret A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the concealment A stage 2002, the effect determination process is terminated, and if it is the concealment A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 440 (step S322). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that there is no game ball entering the second start port 440, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect determination process, and determines that there is a game ball entering the second start port 440. Based on the analysis result of the command of the main control board, the temporary variation number is determined, selected, or set based on the variation pattern (step S324). The provisional variation number is uniquely determined by a variation pattern (for example, see FIG. 141), but is not limited thereto, and may be determined to be an arbitrary provisional variation number as described above. FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted on the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table in accordance with the variable display time transmitted from the main CPU 101 as a command. The variation pattern is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table is stored in the main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU determines the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern table. You may make it transmit a command to.

  When the sub CPU 201 selects the temporary variation number, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs scenario lottery within the range of the number of holds. The scenario lottery refers to determining by lottery at which position in the range of the number of reservations the character subtraction process is to be performed. For example, when it is assumed that there are four start memories that are held, the sub CPU 201 draws a lot from the first hold to the fourth hold to perform the character subtraction process. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery of the position where the character subtraction process is performed in the range of the number of reservations, the battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character is performed without performing the character subtraction process (the battle effect as a draw). It may include a lottery to determine at which position.

  At the time of the lottery, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 to check whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 that covers the number of times of the first hold to the fourth hold. If it is determined that the character is subtracted, the character subtraction process is performed within the range of the reserved number, and if it is determined that the character subtraction is not recorded, the character subtraction process is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold that is the target of the scenario lottery ends. When the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold that is the target of the scenario effect ends, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no scenario effect during the execution of the scenario in step S326, and then the first hold to the fourth hold. It is determined whether or not the start memory is held in either one (step S328).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that the start memory is held in any one of the first hold to the fourth hold, the sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery for the held start memory, but based on the variation pattern. As a means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position according to the determined production pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. (Step S330). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 decides the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as a scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the start memory is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the third hold is held, the sub CPU 201 sets the first hold The start-up memory from the hold to the third hold is determined as the scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start-up memory held in the fourth hold is not set as the scenario lottery target. Further, for example, when the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is a plurality of hold such as the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is released first (variable display is performed first). The start memory until the hold (start memory of the first hold and the second hold) is determined as a scenario lottery object (step S332), and the start memory held in the third hold and the fourth hold is not a scenario lottery object. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the start memories that are held as scenario lottery targets (step S334). In step S330, if it is determined that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory, control such as preventing the character subtraction effect and the reach variation effect from overlapping each other is performed. Since it is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than in the case where it is determined in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. ,

  The sub-CPU 201 performs the processing after step S328 as the scenario lottery in the start memory (the entry to the second start port 440) that is held in the first hold to the fourth hold when the scenario effect being executed is finished. (Starting memory that was originally held) is performed. That is, when there is a scenario effect being executed, the next scenario lottery is not performed, but when the scenario effect being executed is completed, one or a plurality of start-ups held in the first hold to the fourth hold at that time Since the scenario lottery is performed with respect to the memory, in the concealment A stage 2002, as long as the start memory is held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the scenario effect is repeatedly executed without interruption. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the production in the start memory unit and to be interested in the scenario production, and to maintain the player's expectation for a relatively long period of time. Become.

  In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario effect being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A scenario lottery may be performed as long as at least one or more start memories are held in the hold to the fourth hold.

  The reason why the sub CPU 201 sets the start memory until the hold including the reach variation effect as the subject of the scenario lottery and does not set the hold start memory after the reach change effect as the subject of the lottery, This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the battle result between characters decreases. Thus, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the character subtraction processing position based on the performance of the secret A stage 2002.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 440 in step S322, and if it is determined that there is a game ball having entered the second start port 440, the processing after step S324 is performed. If it is determined that there is a game ball entering the first start port 5442 but not the second start port 440, the one held based on the entrance to the first start port 5442 A scenario lottery is performed with only one start memory. In this case, a plurality of temporary fluctuations may or may not be set for one start-up memory that is reserved based on the ball entering the first start port 5442. Then, if it is determined in the scenario pre-setting process that the subtraction effect is to be performed in the variable display of the start memory held based on the entry to the first start port 5442, the process proceeds to the first start port 5442. The subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the start-up memory that is put on hold based on the incoming ball. However, the variable display (or provisional fluctuation set for the one start memory) held on the basis of the entry to the first start port 5442 and the next start memory The subtraction effect is not performed across the temporary variation set for the start-up memory that has been put on hold based on the ball entering the second start-up port 440. Further, when the start memory is suspended based on the entry to the first start port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, and when it is not the big hit For example, control may be performed so that the identification symbol is only variably displayed on the screen end of the first special symbol display unit 73 or the liquid crystal display device 16 without selecting the effect.

  The sub CPU 201 processes the suspension of the scenario lottery range as an effect adjustment target, such as determining the character subtraction processing position for each suspension range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 checks the expectation degree of the effect in the last hold of the scenario lottery range, for example, the heat of the effect (step S336), and reflects the result on the hold effect belonging to the scenario being executed. Good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines the heat of the effect for the last hold in the range of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 may apply a pre-reading effect or a continuous notice effect according to the heat of the effect to the hold effect for the scenario lottery target.

  After passing through the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for assigning effects such as character subtraction processing effects to provisional fluctuations for the effect of holding the scenario lottery target. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 to determine the number of provisional fluctuations necessary for the character subtraction process, and the scenario is held in the start-up memory (for example, the first hold to the fourth hold). For start memory, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory for performing subtraction processing (step S338).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a start memory for executing the subtraction process within the scenario lottery target range, the sub CPU 201 counts the characters to be subtracted for each enemy (step S340). Next, the sub CPU 201 records the order of subtraction processing of two or more characters when the number of subtraction processing combined with the enemy is two or more (step S342: Y) (step S344). Note that the order between the characters of the enemy teammates may be determined in the effect map 2102 or may be determined by lottery.

  Next, as a result of the determination of the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process in the suspension to be the scenario lottery target. It discriminate | determines with reference to the production map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can determine the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for reach precursor fluctuations, or perform an effect adjustment process such as adjusting the position of the temporary fluctuations on which the subtraction process is performed.

  FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 are diagrams illustrating an example of the start-up memory that is held in the first hold to the fourth hold. FIG. 143 shows that the start memory is held for all of the first hold to the fourth hold, the subtraction process and reach variation effect are not executed in the first hold and the fourth hold, and the enemy character is subtracted in the second hold. It shows that the process (a process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) is performed, and that the reach variation effect is performed in the third hold. In FIG. 144, the start memory is held for all of the first hold to the fourth hold, and the subtraction process and the reach effect are not executed in the first hold, the second hold, and the fourth hold, and the enemy is used in the third hold. This shows that the character subtraction process (a process of subtracting the number of enemy characters by 1) and the reach variation effect are performed in an overlapping manner. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process, the sub CPU 201 sets an overlap flag in the work RAM area (step S348).

  When the sub CPU 201 confirms the setting of the overlap flag, if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows the overlap execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process. Execute in the changing production. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 confirms the setting of the duplication flag, but the character to be subtracted is an ally character, the effect that the ally character is defeated in the reach variation effect is expected for the reach variation effect. If the degree is unnecessarily reduced, the overlap execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is not allowed, and the effect of the subtraction process is not executed in the reach change effect. At this time, although the subtraction processing effect of the ally character does not prevent the temporary variation immediately before the reach variation effect from being performed, the compensation effect such as an attack is revived when the lost ally character is revived. What is necessary is just to perform it by a change production. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may assign the ally character subtraction process to a temporary variation that is a predetermined number of distances away from the reach variation effect within the range of the scenario lottery target. If the character to be subtracted is an ally character, the reach variation effect and the subtraction process are allowed to be executed instead of the overlap execution of the reach change effect and the subtraction process. When the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reassigned to another temporary variation.

  In order to assign the reach precursor effect to the temporary variation, the sub CPU 201 includes the suspension in which the reach variation effect and the subtraction process overlap (for example, the third suspension in FIG. For example, the reach precursor effect can be assigned to the temporary fluctuation of the first hold and the second hold in FIG. 144 (step S350). This is because the enemy character subtraction effect is executed as a reach variation effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of pending temporary variations subject to scenario lottery) − (number of subtraction processes−1)] as the number of temporary variations that can be applied to the reach precursor effect. When the sub CPU 201 performs the subtraction process on the teammate character, the sub CPU 201 executes step S352 described later without executing step S350.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the effect of the subtraction process do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub CPU 201 removes the temporary variation number assigned the effect of the subtraction process of the character (not limited to the enemy ally) from the total temporary variation number determined for the suspension to be the scenario lottery target. (Remaining provisional fluctuation) can be used for reach sign production. Here, the sub CPU 201 performs the reach precursor effect only when it is determined that the remaining provisional variation number is 0 or more, and determines that the reach precursor effect is not performed when the remaining provisional variation number is 0. The control process can be made smooth, and an effect that a reach fluctuation effect is expected by this reach sign effect can be expected. When the remaining provisional change number is 1, it may be determined that the reach sign is not performed, or the reach sign may be determined to be executed up to once.

  The start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not included in the start memory held within the range of the scenario lottery object, and the start memory next to the start memory to be digested last among the scenario lottery objects is In the case of the reach variation effect, although the next start memory is not the scenario lottery target, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach precursor effect to the temporary variation set for the start memory to be digested last among the scenario lottery targets. And the reach variation effect may be performed in the variable display of the start memory stored in the next hold.

  The sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the reach precursor effect, and the number of executions of the determined reach precursor effect is the number of provisional numbers obtained by subtracting from the total provisional fluctuation number determined for the suspension subject to scenario lottery. You may make it use a fluctuation | variation for the effect of the subtraction process of a character.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the sub CPU 201 selects a sign of reach according to whether or not the duplication flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not there is a duplicate flag set. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a duplicate flag set, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach sign effect as a specific effect (step S356), and the enemy character. Will give players a sense of expectation that will be defeated in the reach variation direction. Here, the specific effect is an effect with a high expectation that can be given to the player. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that there is no duplicate flag set, the reach precursor effect is determined to be an effect in which the expectation that can be given to the player is smaller than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the reach sign effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. The sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue when the reach sign effect is performed a plurality of times within the range of the scenario effect target. However, the specific effects may be continued.

  Next, in step S350 or step S352, the sub CPU 201 selects a temporary variation number to be used as a precursor to reach from the counted temporary variation number (step S360). For example, the sub CPU 201 may select the temporary variation number by changing the table because the necessary temporary variation number varies depending on the contents of the reach sign effect. The sub CPU 201 selects the temporary variation used for the reach sign production from the temporary variation with the slowest digestion order among the temporary variations for the scenario lottery target. Thereby, the reach sign effect can be arranged at a position close to the reach fluctuation effect. When selecting “0 variation”, the sub CPU 201 does not assign the reach precursor effect to the temporary variation and does not perform the reach precursor effect. The concept of “0 fluctuation” includes both the 0 temporary fluctuation and the case where the start memory is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. In other words, the sub CPU 201 assigns the reach precursor effect to the temporary variation both when the zero temporary variation is selected and when the start memory is not suspended in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. There will be no sign of reach. In addition, when there is no reach variation effect in the start memory of the scenario lottery target, the reach precursor effect is a GASE reach indicator effect. Note that when the start-up memory is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the greece reach sign effect is not performed.

  By the way, as described above, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in any of the first hold to the fourth hold is not held, the sub CPU 201 selects all of the held start memories for the scenario lottery. The target is decided. However, since the concealment A stage 2002 is in the short-time game state, when the scenario lottery target is determined, the start memory is often held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold. Therefore, if the player grasps that the current scenario production is for four start memories, there is a possibility that the reach variation production is not included in the range of the current scenario production target. There is a risk that it will be difficult for the player to sense that the price is high and to maintain a sense of expectation. Therefore, when determining the scenario lottery target, when there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the number of start memories to be the target of the scenario lottery is different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. In particular, there is a possibility that unpleasantness will not be achieved if the player has perceived that the range of reach of the scenario production is not likely to include the reach variation production even though the player has perceived that . However, by making it difficult to perceive that the reach range of this scenario production does not include the reach variation production, the GASE reach sign production will maintain the player's expectation and provide an effective production be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of provisional fluctuations used for the reach precursor effect is greater than 0 (step S362). The number of provisional fluctuations used in the above is made into a block, and a block pattern to which a reach precursor effect is assigned is selected (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 assigns a reach sign effect to a block to which a reach sign effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for reach sign is 3, and two provisional fluctuations are necessary for reach sign production, the sub CPU 201 blocks three provisional fluctuations, and (1) 1 block + 1 block +1 block pattern and (2) 1 block + 2 block pattern are formed. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign reach indication effects to the two blocks. FIG. 146 shows an aspect in which three temporary fluctuations are blocked in this way.

  Next, referring to FIG. 147, if the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, the sub CPU 201 determines which temporary fluctuation block the subtraction process effect is to be performed by, for example, random lottery (step S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the temporary variation to which the effect of the subtraction process is assigned by lottery or the like from the temporary variations to which the reach precursor effect is not allocated among the temporary variations to be subjected to the scenario lottery (step S372). When there is an order of subtraction processing for a plurality of characters (step S342), provisional variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. An example will be described as follows.

  For example, by the determination of the scenario lottery target (steps S332 and S334), the start memory in which the subtraction process of the teammate character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target, and the start memory in which the subtraction process of the enemy character is recorded Are held in this order. In step S370, the sub CPU 201 determines that the enemy character subtraction process is a medium attack effect for a relatively long time, and the friend character subtraction process is a relatively short time weak attack effect. At this time, the sub CPU 201 assigns the medium attack effect to two temporary fluctuations, assigns the weak attack effect to one temporary fluctuation, and these temporary fluctuations are digested before the latter temporary fluctuation. The position of the variation can be determined. In this way, the sub CPU 201 assigns a subtraction effect to, for example, one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

  Here, an example in which the effect of one subtraction process is assigned to temporary variation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is an example of a temporary variation sequence in a state in which the first hold to the third hold are the scenario lottery targets. For the start-up memory stored in the first hold, since the fluctuation time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations set is one (# 1). As for the start memory stored in the second hold, since the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations set is three (# 2 to # 4). Regarding the start memory stored in the third hold, the variable display time is “11.5 seconds + reach fluctuation effect”, and therefore, the number of temporary fluctuations set is three (# 5 to # 7). Regarding the start memory stored in the third hold, since the reach variation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold. . In the example of FIG. 147, the start memory in which the number of subtraction processes in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) is held in the first hold. 1 time (weak attack effect), 0 in the start memory held in the second hold, 2 times in the start memory held in the third hold (one time each in the order of the medium attack effect and the weak attack effect 2 in total) Example).

  In the example shown in FIG. 148, since the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold is the target of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 executes the weak attack effect, the medium attack effect, and the weak attack effect in this order. Re-determine when to perform the performance. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the weak attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the first hold is assigned to the temporary variation # 2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the second hold. Are assigned to the # 4 provisional variation and # 5 provisional variation that are blocked, and the weak attack effect recorded in the start-up memory held in the third hold is assigned to the # 6 provisional variation. In this way, the subtraction effect of the character is based on the temporary variation set for one start memory and the start memory digested next to the one start memory, regardless of the reserved start memory unit. It may straddle the set temporary fluctuation. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the production mode without being bound by one game result (lottery result). In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times of short-time digestion. Moreover, in the concealment A stage 2002, an effect mode that is performed during execution of the temporary variation divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined as indicating the degree of expectation that the game state is a high probability game state. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of time reductions, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 148, all the three subtraction effects recorded in the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold are executed in any one of the temporary fluctuations (# 1 to # 7). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may perform control so that the subtraction effect that is executed last is executed in reach variation.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect for the temporary variation to which no effect is assigned (step S374). FIG. 149 is an example of a temporary variation sequence in a state in which the first hold to the fourth hold (for example, see FIG. 139) are scenario lottery targets. An effect of subtraction processing is assigned to temporary fluctuations # 2 and # 4, a reach precursor effect is assigned to temporary fluctuation # 7, and temporary changes # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 to which no effect is assigned are assigned, for example. In addition, it is possible to arrange a single-shot effect with a weaker impression to the player than the subtraction processing effect or the reach sign effect. The contents of the effects arranged in the temporary variations # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 and the temporary variations to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The single production is arranged on the temporary fluctuation side with a younger number than the reach sign production. By assigning effects to all the temporary variations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction process is determined. The number of provisional fluctuations assigned varies depending on the contents of the performance. The sub CPU 201 generates effect designation information including information on a sequence in which effects are assigned to all temporary variations.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the scenario lottery target hold (step S376), and when there is a reach variation effect in the scenario lottery target hold, determines the reach effect (step S378). Then, the effect determination process ends. For example, the sub CPU 201 can select the reach effect with reference to the result of the subtraction process. Reach production where characters remaining in the battle appear can be selected.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 refers to the counter with respect to the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, calculates the combination of the number of allies of the teammate character and the teammate character, and combines the number of people and / or the number of times when the time has been digested (or Based on the remaining number of times, the presence / absence of execution of the reach effect and the mode of reach fluctuation effect can be set. For example, if the remaining number of people is less than 2 × 2 and the hold is other than the final rotation at the specified short rotation speed, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, a special form of reach (SP reach) is executed. For example, in a battle effect, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 may execute a special SP reach effect when the remaining number combination is 1 × 1 and the hold is the last variable display with a specified short time.

  In addition, when the scenario production target range includes a start memory in which the last variable display is performed in the concealment A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of times is reduced to 48 times, the 48th variable display in the time-short game state) If the reach variation effect and the big hit effect are not performed in the last variable display in the short-time gaming state, the character's game is determined so that the battle effect wins or loses in the final variable display. A subtraction effect may be performed. In this case, it is not the impression that the concealment A stage 2002 has ended because the short-time gaming state has reached the specified number of times (disclosed as to whether or not it is a high-probability gaming state). An impression that the stage 2002 has ended can be given to the player.

  The effect map determined before the start of the concealment A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) by the sub CPU 201 determines the holding range for the scenario lottery (FIG. 140: S332, S334). The number of times when the subtraction process in 2102 is executed can be moved within a range of ± 3 in accordance with the variation pattern of the secret A stage 2002. For example, when it is determined that the subtraction process is to be executed when the time reduction is 8 in the calculation map, the subtraction process can move within the range of the time reduction count of 5 to 11. More specifically, when the start memory with a time reduction of 8 is held in the fourth hold, it can move within the range of the time reduction of 5 to 8, and the start memory with the time reduction of 8 is held in the first hold. Sometimes it can move within the range of 8 to 11 times. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 performs the character subtraction process accompanying the battle between the character teams while increasing the variation of the production by changing the execution timing of the subtraction process fluidly according to the development of the game of the concealment A stage 2002. It can be executed reliably.

  In the above-described embodiment, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by the lottery ends. Therefore, in order to make the scenario effects being executed in various ways, for example, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the hold within the range of the scenario effects being executed, and uses this as an effect that is executed during the variable display of the hold digest. You may apply. For example, if the reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect object being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a pre-read lottery for the start memory until the reach variation effect. If there is no reach variation effect, the suggestion effect that suggests the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach variation effect) is applied to the effect being executed. Note that the sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when there is no hold.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 does not pre-read the start memory held at the time of start winning and apply it to the pre-read effect at the time of winning, but also applies it to the effect executed during the fluctuation of the reserved use. Good. For example, if the start memory is held in the fourth hold due to the start winning while the scenario effect for the first hold to the third hold is being executed, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the fourth hold effect, for example, The pre-reading effect for the fourth hold can be superimposed on the effect for the second hold or / and the third hold.

  Further, in the concealment A stage 2002, the liquid crystal screen does not show a hold, so there is no pre-reading effect at the start winning prize, but the hold pre-reading effect set at the start winning prize is from the start winning to the display of the effect Since it is not possible to spend a lot of time, it is unavoidable to produce an effect with few processing branches by, for example, a simple process that changes the reserved color. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 performs the pre-reading effect of the start-up memory held in the fourth hold by using a part or all of the data of the pre-reading effect of the first hold to the third hold (for example, the data of the scenario effect). If possible, the control load can be reduced. As a result, the pre-reading effect of the start-up memory held in the fourth hold is more varied than the monotonous one that only changes the hold color. Can be realized.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart of a modification when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 140) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 150, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second start opening 440 (step S400). If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the starting memory of the scenario target being executed (step S402). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the pre-memory effect in which the winning is slower than the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded. The pre-reading effect is selected as the target of (step S404). If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it determines whether or not the prefetch effect is already being executed (step S406). If the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the pre-reading effect that is already being executed is continued (step S408). If the pre-reading effect is not being executed, the pre-reading effect is reserved within the target range of the scenario effect being executed. A prefetch effect is selected for all start memories (step S410).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, unlike the conventional pachinko machine in which an effect is performed for each start memory, the number of executions of one or more temporary fluctuations for each start memory that has been held. Therefore, although it is a variable display for one start-up memory, it appears as if a variable display for a plurality of start-up memories is being performed. In addition, the temporary variation determined for each start memory is blocked into a predetermined unit using a plurality of temporary variations regardless of the start memory unit. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the temporary variation that is blocked in the predetermined unit is determined. Further, as described above, a part of the plurality of temporary fluctuations determined for one start-up memory and a plurality of determined start-up memories for other start-up memories that are variably displayed next to the one start-up memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the provisional variation is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. As described above, since the production mode is determined without being constrained by the unit of the start memory, it is also possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of start memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each starting memory.

  In addition, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state (a short-time gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player separately from the big hit gaming state, the big hit judgment is made by extending the period controlled to the specific gaming state. There is a possibility that the winning probability in the processing must be lowered, and the interest is lowered. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp such suppression while suppressing the number of time reductions. At the same time, since the winning probability in the jackpot determination can be made moderate, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the player knows the period of the secret A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the short-time gaming state. Can be made difficult. In other words, the number of time reductions is predetermined at the time of winning, for example, with conventional pachinko machines, even if it is concealed whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, it will not be won It has been disclosed whether or not it is a high probability gaming state when a certain number of times are consumed. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the concealment A stage 2002 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of times the digested time is short, and it is possible to maintain the expectation. Become. Moreover, during the concealment A stage 2002, a character subtraction effect is performed as an index indicating the degree of expectation that the player is in a high-probability gaming state. Rather, it can be directed to the subtraction effect of the character, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment A stage 2002 by setting one or more temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the concealment A stage 2002 The character subtraction effect that can serve as an index as to whether or not the game state is a high-probability gaming state is performed. The scenario of the subtraction effect is such that the high probability gaming state is determined when the enemy group is annihilated and the low probability gaming state is determined when the ally group is annihilated in the scenario effect including the final time of the short time. The outline is decided before it becomes. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not an effect that whether or not a high-probability gaming state is disclosed when a certain number of times are consumed, but a high probability when the victory or defeat of the battle effect is settled It is possible to execute an effect such as whether or not the game state is disclosed.

  Next, the change effect of BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the big hit gaming state is finished and then the concealment A stage 2002 is entered, the timing of the concealment A stage 2002 is terminated (for example, a specified number of times (for example, 48 times)). At the digested timing), it is disclosed whether the game state is a high probability game state or a low probability state based on the final result of the battle effect described above. When the disclosed result is the high probability gaming state, the process proceeds to the high probability stage 2004 (when the disclosed result is the low probability gaming state, the process proceeds to the normal stage 2000).

  The sub CPU 201 performs the BGM change lottery during the big hit gaming state in which the probability variation flag is turned on and during the concealment A stage 2002 when the concealed gaming state is the high probability gaming state. In other words, when winning the big hit with the probability change flag turned on, the BGM change lottery is performed twice after the big hit gaming state is started and before the transition to the high probability stage 2004 through the concealment A stage 2002. Become. However, when the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit gaming state is won, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent secret A stage 2002.

  When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs from the speaker 24 through the voice control circuit 205 a high-accuracy confirmed BGM that is confirmed to be in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, when shifting from the concealment A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, the high-confirmation BGM is not always output, and even when moving from the concealment A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, it was a part. Highly accurate BGM is not output.

  The sub CPU 201 controls to output a high-accuracy confirmed BGM in response to winning the BGM change lottery, but the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in response to winning the BGM change lottery. Will not change. Therefore, even if the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, the flow of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 remains unchanged.

  When the sub CPU 201 wins the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 also determines the timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM (that is, the timing for changing from the normal BGM to the high-accuracy confirmed BGM). The timing for outputting the high-confirmation BGM is, for example, during the big hit gaming state or during the concealment A stage 2002.

  As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit gaming state, when outputting a high-accuracy confirmed BGM during the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 201 also moves to the concealed A stage 2002 after the big hit gaming state ends. Subsequently, control is performed so that the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output. However, for the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls to display the effect image that is normally displayed in the concealment A stage 2002.

  As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit gaming state, when outputting the high-confirmation BGM during the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the concealment A stage 2002 the big hit gaming state is output. Predetermined during. First, the output timing of the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is determined in increments of a certain number of times, and further random lottery is performed within the range of the determined times. More specifically, for example, when the number of time reductions is 48, 1-6, 7-12, 13-18, 19-24, 25-30, 31-36, 37-42, 43 Predetermine any of the 48 groups. Next, it is determined in advance at which timing of the determined group the high-accuracy BGM is to be output. For example, when the group is determined to be 13 to 18 times, the sub CPU 201 determines in advance the timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM within the range of 13 to 18 times. For example, when it is determined 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs a high-accuracy confirmed BGM in the variable display for the 16th time reduction.

  Note that when the start memory is suspended in the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a temporary variation for each start memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines in which temporary variation the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, similarly to the character subtraction effect. For example, if the timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM has been determined in advance for the 16th time in a short time, the sub CPU 201 determines all or a part of the temporary variation set for the start-up memory held for the 16th time. Is used to output a high-accuracy confirmed BGM. At this time, like the medium attack effect as the character subtraction effect, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is used as a temporary variation set for one start memory and a start memory digested after the one start memory. In some cases, it is executed across the provisional fluctuation set. As described above, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM can also be executed regardless of the variable display in the start memory unit, and the variable display in the start memory unit can be further prevented from being recognized by the player. .

[Pre-reading effect selection process (high accuracy stage)]
Next, prefetch effect selection processing in the high-accuracy stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current performance state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 151). If it is determined that the current performance state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a start winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). A determination is made (step S502). If it is determined that there has been a start winning (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 draws which system of the production is to be performed with respect to the reserved start memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo lotus effect, a change in a reserved image, and a look-ahead effect described later.

  In step S506, it is determined whether or not the effect selected in the lottery in step S504 is a pre-read effect (step S506 in FIG. 151). The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is an aspect in which an effect related to the start memory held during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the start memory (including a plurality of start memories) won before the start memory is performed. It is. Details of the prefetch effect will be described later. If it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), a prefetch effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, “determination of performing a pre-reading effect” indicates that a lottery for performing a pre-reading effect has been won.

  Here, the prefetch effect section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern when determining a section in which a prefetch effect is performed. Here, the upper frame in FIG. 152 (A) indicates the reserved frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 in the reserved frame indicate the first to fourth reserved. The lower frame located below the hold frame indicates an effect type frame, and describes what effect is scheduled to be performed in each hold. In the present embodiment, the fourth hold is a hold (YES in step S502 in FIG. 151) that is won during the high-accuracy stage 2004, and it is determined that a pre-reading effect is to be performed (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151). is there. In the first hold, it is determined to perform the black effect (FIG. 152A). For example, the ink effect is an effect that causes the entire screen to darken instantaneously as if the ink on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 was spilled violently, or overlapped with the spilled ink. The effect is such that characters such as "" are written with a brush.

  Since the pre-reading effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all stored start memories, all start operations are performed as long as the start memories are held in the first hold to the fourth hold in this embodiment. Can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it is already determined that the black ink effect is performed in the first hold, in this case, the corresponding section is not included in the target section determined in the prefetch effect section determination process. It is good. Also, for the start memory that is reserved next to the start memory for which the black effect is determined to be performed (corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 152B), the target section determined in the prefetch effect section determination process Not included. This is stored as the first hold because the ink effect performed by the variable display of the start memory stored as the first hold is an effect that may cause the player to expect the stand alone. It is preferable to clearly separate the black effect produced by the variable display of the start memory and the prefetch effect related to the fourth hold start memory (the prefetch effect performed by the third hold and the fourth hold). Because. In other words, the black effect is performed in the first hold, and the effect is not particularly performed in the second hold, so that the pre-reading effect related to the fourth hold (the effect performed in the third hold and the fourth hold). There can be an effect of enhancing expectation and fun.

  If the pre-reading effect related to the fourth hold is performed including the black effect performed in the first hold, that is, the pre-reading effect is performed in the section from the first hold to the fourth hold, the player has a plurality of pre-read effects. While a series of performances can be expected, you can have a sense of expectation. On the other hand, these series of performances are performed continuously in different categories, or related performances are continuously performed as pre-reading effects. There is a demerit that it is difficult to discriminate whether it has been broken, and there is a possibility that the interest as a look-ahead effect will be cut off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), when it is determined that the section in which the pre-reading effect is to be performed is the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151), the effect scenario to be executed with these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 152). For the production scenario, a lottery is drawn for each holding, and the production scenario is set only for the holding that won the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when a third lottery is won for the lottery (see the third hold in FIG. 152D), an effect scenario is set for the third hold, and the fourth hold is the second hold. The production based on the scenario determined by the 3 suspension will be performed.

  The effect scenario includes an effect that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment) by prefetching development and an effect that does not affect the development of the hold by prefetching. The effect of the pre-reading development on the development of the hold means that an effect similar to the pre-reading effect is performed even in the hold, and corresponds to, for example, the above-described black ink production. The effect that does not affect the development by the pre-reading development corresponds to, for example, an effect that is performed only during the hold, such as a movable effect of an accessory. For the effect that affects the development by the pre-reading deployment, a scenario lottery is performed for the suspension before the suspension (corresponding to the third suspension in the present embodiment). On the other hand, an effect that does not affect the development due to the pre-reading development includes the holding (corresponding to the fourth holding in the present embodiment) and performs a scenario lottery.

  When the production scenario is set for the hold that is won in the large-scale lottery (step S510 in FIG. 151), the details of the prefetching production are selected (step S512). An example of selecting details of the prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of selecting details of the prefetch effect. FIG. 153 (A) is determined to perform the pre-reading effect (YES in step S500 in FIG. 151) by winning the start-up prize in the fourth hold in the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 in FIG. 151 and S502 in FIG. 151). An example of a state in which the pre-reading effect section and the effect scenario are determined is shown.

  When the pre-reading effect section and the determination of the effect scenario are described in detail, since the section in which the pre-reading effect is performed is selected for all the stored start memories, the section in which the pre-reading effect is performed is the first hold in the present embodiment. -It is determined that it is the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of pre-reading effect scenarios. The first is the effect that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the pre-read development, and the second is the pre-read effect. There is a production that does not affect the development. As an effect that affects the development of the hold by the development of the pre-reading, lots other than the hold (first hold to third hold) are selected. Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. As a result, in this embodiment, it is determined that the black effect is performed in the second hold and the third hold. For the effects that do not affect the development by the pre-reading development, lots are drawn for the first holding to the fourth holding including the holding. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first hold to the fourth hold.

  In this case, when the start memory held in the first hold to the fourth hold is digested, the ink effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and the ink effect is ended, but the accessory is ended. The player will encounter a situation where the can move. Then, it is difficult for the player to determine whether these series of productions are individual productions or related productions. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), if it is determined that the black effect such as the third hold is not performed in the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment), the fourth hold The effect that does not affect the development by the development of the pre-reading (in this embodiment, the movable article is canceled) is canceled (rewritten as “none”).

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether or not the details of the prefetch effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 151 is a countdown effect (step S514). The countdown effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example when the details of the prefetching effect are countdown effects. FIG. 154 (A) is determined to win the fourth hold during the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 in FIG. 151 and YES in step S502), and to perform a pre-reading effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151). ), An example of a state in which the prefetch effect section and the effect scenario are determined.

  When the pre-reading effect section and the determination of the effect scenario are described in detail, since the section in which the pre-reading effect is performed is selected for all the stored start memories, the section in which the pre-reading effect is performed is the first hold in the present embodiment. -It is determined that it is the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of presentation scenarios for prefetch effects. The first is an effect that affects the development of the prefetching (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment), and the second is prefetching. There is a production that does not affect the development. It is determined that the countdown effect is performed in the first hold to the third hold as the effect that affects the hold development by the pre-reading development. Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. For the effects that do not affect the development by the pre-reading development, lots are drawn for the first holding to the fourth holding including the holding. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first hold to the fourth hold.

  In this case, when the first hold to the fourth hold are digested, a countdown effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and in the fourth hold, although the countdown effect is not performed, Players will encounter the situation of moving. When the countdown is set to 0 (zero), if it is set that the big hit is confirmed (winning in the main CPU 101), the pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is determined to be lost. In this case, other effects (this embodiment) In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether these series of productions were individual productions or related productions. There is a possibility that (movable accessory in this embodiment) is received as meaningless to the player.

  Therefore, if it is determined that the effect selected in step S514 of FIG. 151 is a countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether or not the result of the selected countdown effect is gusset (step S516). . If it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is gusset (YES in step S516), it is determined whether another effect scenario has been determined up to the hold (step S518). If it is determined that another production scenario has been determined to be on hold (YES in step S518), the other production scenario in the hold is canceled (step S520).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first hold to the third hold is not performed in the fluctuation (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment). In the fourth hold, an effect that does not affect the development by development of prefetching (in this embodiment, a movable article is canceled) is rewritten (rewritten as “none”).

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the game at the normal stage 2000, a look-ahead effect of the reserved start-up memory accompanied by a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is performed. The pre-reading effect of the reserved start memory accompanied by the background change is a background change as an effect with respect to the start memory (the hold) held by the start winning (the winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440). If it is decided by lottery when performing, the production based on the background change scenario of the hold is performed across the start memory held before the hold, and the background change of the hold is made continuous It is. As a variation of the pre-reading effect, in addition to the image preview, a lamp preview, an accessory preview, and the like can be given. Background change control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the background change control process. FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the background change continuable count determination process. FIG. 157 is an example of a table regarding the background change control and the background change scenario. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of the background change control process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start memory (the hold) held by the start winning (the winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) has won the background change lottery (see FIG. Step S530 of 155). If it is determined that the hold has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change continuous possible number determination process is performed based on the start memory held before the hold until the background change of the hold. It is determined how many fluctuations the effect can be performed (step S532). The background change continuation possible number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines the background change continuable number of times in the background change continuation possible number determination process, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the hold (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 157 (A) (step S534 of FIG. 155), the sub CPU 201 displays the production information set in each start memory related to the background change scenario, for example, , Information related to the fluctuating effects such as “ordinary deviation” and “reach deviation” is rewritten to the background transition table based on the background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 155). An example of the background change scenario will be described later.

  The background change continuation count determination process in the background change control process of FIG. 155 will be described with reference to FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the start memory held by the start winning (the hold) has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530 in FIG. 155), the background change in FIG. In the continuous possible times determination process, the number of times that the effect can be continuously produced before the pending background change is determined (step S540 in FIG. 6). The continuous possible number of times refers to the number of starting memories in a section that goes back from the hold (the hold) to be the background change target and is not normally won by the background change lottery due to the normal shift.

  A case will be described with reference to FIG. 158 where the winning start memory (the hold) is 4 (the fourth hold). In FIG. 158A, when the hold is won, the start-up memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the production contents of “normally lost” are set in the first hold to the third hold, respectively. It is the state that was done. That is, the reserved number is “4”. In the background change continuation possible count determination process in FIG. 156, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a continuous effect related to the hold background change can be performed for the three start memories except the hold start memory. Determine whether or not.

  When the sub CPU 201 decrements (subtracts) the hold number in step S542 in FIG. 156, 4-1 = 3 is obtained. That is, it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continued among the first hold to the third hold. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of holds is not 0 (step S544 in FIG. 156). As described above, since the hold number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 next determines whether or not the third hold has cleared the continuable condition (step S546). The continuable condition is a condition described in the continuable condition table in FIG. 157 (B).

  The continuous possible condition in FIG. 7 (B) is that the hold (starting memory) referred to is “2” in the background change scenario in FIG. “None” or “normal system”, “3” is not won in the hold change lottery, that is, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a mode different from the default display mode by the hold change lottery. It is not that the “4” pre-reading effect lottery is not won, that is, it is not a target of another pre-reading effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuation is possible only when all of the conditions “1” to “4” are satisfied.

  Here, since the third hold in FIG. 158 (A) is “ordinary loss”, all of the continuation conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. Therefore, the third hold is a start hold that allows a pre-reading effect. Then, the number of possible continuous times is incremented (added) in step S548 in FIG. 156 (step S548 in FIG. 156). That is, the continuous possible number of times 0 + 1 = 1. The process of incrementing the continuous possible number is repeated until the pending number becomes zero or cannot be cleared to the continuous possible condition.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is decremented, 3-1 = 2 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the second reservation can be continued. Since the hold number 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is next determined whether or not the second hold clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the second suspension in FIG. 158 (A) is “ordinary loss”, the continuation conditions (1) to (4) are all satisfied. In other words, since the second hold can be pre-readed, the number of possible continuations is incremented in step S548 in FIG. 156 (step S548 in FIG. 156), so that the number of possible continuations 1 + 1 = 2.

  Further, when the number of hold is decremented, 2-1 = 1 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continued. Since the hold number 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is next determined whether or not the first hold clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the first suspension in FIG. 158 (A) is “ordinary loss”, the continuation conditions (1) to (4) are all satisfied. In other words, since the first hold can be prefetched, the number of possible continuations is incremented in step S548 in FIG. 156 (step S548 in FIG. 156), so the number of possible continuations 2 + 1 = 3. Next, when the reserved number is decremented, it becomes 1-1 = 0 (step S544 in FIG. 156), and the reserved number becomes 0 (NO in step S544). It is determined that there is.

  If it is determined in the background change continuable count determination process that the continuable count is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 155), a background change scenario is selected based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 157A. In the present embodiment, the number of consecutive prefetches is 3 in FIG. 3, no. 7-No. 9, no. 13-No. 15, no. 19-No. 21 is selected.

  For example, the background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is “normal”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before and 1 change are all “normal”. Also, for example, the background change scenario No. When 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is “normal”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before and 1 change are “normal”, “evening”, and “evening” in order. It has become. This is expected that the background changes from the normal system to the evening background by the time of the change of the hold (fourth hold) and that some story effect is continuously performed.

  In addition, for example, the background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is “Japanese style”, and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before and 1 change are all “Japanese style houses”. This can be used as an effect that has a higher sense of expectation than “normal” in the background change scenario type. Also, for example, the background change scenario No. 13-No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is “attack” and can be used as an effect with higher expectation than the “Japanese style” state. In particular, for the background change scenario type “attack”, since the effect of “enemy attack” is made in the background change scenario, it may indicate that the mode changes to a special mode (zone).

  An example of FIG. 158 (B) will be described. In FIG. 158B, when the hold is won, the start-up memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the production contents of “normally lost” are set in the second hold to the third hold, respectively. However, it is understood that “background change”, that is, a background change scenario is set in the first hold. In this case, the number of holdings is “4”, and in the background change continuation possible number determination process of FIG. 156, among these four starting memories, three starting memories excluding the holding are continuous effects related to the background change of the holding. Whether or not is possible is determined.

  In step S542 of FIG. 156, when the number of reservations is decremented, 4-1 = 3, and it is determined whether or not the third reservation can be continued. As described above, since the hold number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether the third hold clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the third hold in FIG. 158 (B) is “ordinary loss”, the continuation conditions (1) to (4) are all satisfied. Accordingly, since the third hold can be prefetched, the number of continuous possible times is incremented in step S548 in FIG. 156 (step S548 in FIG. 156). That is, the continuous possible number of times 0 + 1 = 1. Since the same applies to the second hold, the number of possible continuous times is 1 + 1 = 2.

  Then, when the number of reservations is decremented in step S542 in FIG. 156, 2-1 = 1, and it is determined whether or not the first reservation can be continued. As described above, since the number of holdings 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first holding clears the continuable condition (step S546). Since the first suspension in FIG. 158 (B) is “background change”, among the continuous possible conditions (1) to (4), in the background change scenario of FIG. ) Or “normal system”.

  Then, in step S546 in FIG. 156, it is determined that the continuation possible condition has not been cleared (NO in step S546 in FIG. 156), so in the background change continuation possible number determination process, it is determined that the continuation possible number is 2. Is done.

<Variation scenario determination process>
A variation scenario determination process performed when the suspended start-up memory (for example, the first suspension to the fourth suspension) starts to change will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the start memory held by the start winning (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) is the background performance change effect related to the start memory held after the hold. Or, it can be rewritten to effect information different from that at the beginning of the prize by pre-reading effects. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the conditions given at the start of the change.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation scenario determination process. In the variation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a variation start time at the start of the variation in which the start winning or the held start memory is digested by the variation (step S550 in FIG. 159). If it is determined that the time is the start of fluctuation (YES in step S550), it is determined whether or not the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (step S552). Examples of the normal system include an effect different from an effect that affects a player in some way, such as an attack or assault described later.

  If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (YES in step S552), it is determined whether the background is an exception target (step S554). The exception target is, for example, “1” among the effects determined in the background change scenario lottery in the background change control process described above, and when “2” is determined to be an effect that rushes into a Japanese-style house with the change, “2 “When it is determined that the change is an effect that enters the enemy attack effect,“ 3 ”the change may correspond to the next change in the evening background.

  If it is determined that the object is an exception target (YES in step S554), an effect corresponding to the exception condition is executed in the normal background exception process (step S556). For example, if it is determined that “1” is an effect that rushes into a Japanese-style house with the change, a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is executed, and “2” is an effect that rushes into an enemy attack effect with the change. If it is decided, the effect related to the enemy attack will be set in the normal background scenario lottery, and “3” will be processed if the change corresponds to the next change in the evening background. It is done. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an exception target (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is performed (step S558).

  If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not a normal system (NO in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is performed (step S562). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether or not the background is Japanese (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is performed (step S566).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese (NO in step S564), it is determined whether or not the background is an attack (step S568). If it is determined that the background is an attack (YES in step S568), an attack background scenario lottery is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an attack (NO in step S570), an assault background scenario lottery is performed (step S572). The expectation level in the production performed as a result of these scenario lotteries increases in the order of normal background, evening background, normal background exception, Japanese style, attack, and assault.

<Chance up control process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the stage is the normal stage 2000 or the high-accuracy stage 2004, a chance to generate an effect related to the effect that occurred first as a changing effect that develops into a super reach. Control processing is possible. The chance up control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance up control process.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current change is the effect being changed (step S580 in FIG. 160). If it is determined that the effect displayed during the current fluctuation is the effect during the fluctuation (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not the chance up is executed (step S582). If it is determined that the chance up is executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not the chance up has already been performed in the fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether or not the chance up flag is 1 (step S584).

  If it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), a chance up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance-up flag is not 1 indicates that the chance-up effect has not yet been performed with the change. Therefore, a normal performance that can introduce a chance-up effect is selected. When the chance up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is 1 (NO in step S584), a chance up effect related to the effect executed last time is set (step S600). For example, if the effect executed last time, that is, the effect executed based on the chance up introduction effect is a conversation effect in which the character A appears, the character A appears again as the chance up effect, and further the previous conversation There is an effect that will be a conversation that has developed while being related to, and an effect that will develop into a super reach with the appearance of the character B related to the character A. In this way, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for the super reach effect by controlling the effect to be generated later to be related to or developed from the effect to be generated first.

  If the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or a chance-up effect related to the effect executed last time in step S600 is set (step S600), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation has ended (step S590). . If it is determined that the change has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, if it is determined that the change has not ended (NO in step S590), the chance-up control process ends.

<Hold change determination process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the start memory is put on hold by the start winning (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440), the player can visually recognize that the hold has been made. Display (or notify) in a manner. As a display mode, for example, one that displays the number on a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 can be cited. Further, the display (design) of the reserved start-up memory can be changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The hold change is to change the hold image. The hold change determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold change determination process.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a pending winning (step S610 in FIG. 161). Whether or not it is a pending winning is not whether or not there is a starting winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), but as described above, the start memory is held and the game is held It is a state that can be displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by a person. If it is determined that the winning is a holding prize (YES in step S610), a holding change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

  In the pending change scenario lottery in step S612, a scenario relating to the pending change is lottery. Specifically, the scenario regarding the pending change is how many confrontations are made under the condition that the display of the hold is changed only when the former wins, due to the confrontation between the power and the power. Decide), decide whether to make a pending change, etc. A confrontation mode is, for example, a ninja art confrontation. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined in the pending change scenario lottery in step S612 (step S612), it is next determined which character to select from the armor (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that will always be a victory of the former (determined hold change).

  Next, in step S616, a second character and a scenario to confront with the former are selected. Here, in the present embodiment, there is only one power character selected in the first character lottery in step S614, but a maximum of eight battle characters are selected for confrontation. Then, scenarios such as stories and cut-ins when appearing are also determined by confrontation B character scenario lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that will always be a victory of the former (determined hold change).

  Next, a confrontation process is performed in step S618 (step S618). When the former wins (YES in step S6620), the hold image is changed by the hold change process. Changes in the hold image may include, for example, changing the starting memory image displayed with the red shuriken image to a yellow shuriken image, or changing the one displayed with the shuriken image into a ninja book (a scroll), etc. Any display different from the current display may be used. When one battle is completed, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations after subtraction in step S624 is not 0 (NO in step S626), confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

  When the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), the development effect process is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development effect process, there is an effect that develops into super reach after the confrontation between the power and the power.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S620 that A is not a win in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not the game is a draw (step S630). If it is determined that it is a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of confrontations n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 is not 0 (NO in step S626), confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

  When the development effect process ends in step S628 or when it is determined in step S630 that it is not a draw (NO in step S630), the hold change determination process ends. Note that a pseudo-ream may be used in the production of the confrontation between the power and the power in the hold change.

[Character lamp]
In this embodiment, when the character lamp (LED 1562) emits light, a picture such as a character appears inside the opening window 1552. Hereinafter, the character lamp (LED 1562) is simply referred to as a character lamp.

  While the sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp is lit when starting the variable display of the identification symbol, there is a case in which it is determined whether or not the character lamp is lit in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. .

  Then, since there is a timing at which the character lamp selected at the time of starting the variable display of the identification symbol and a timing at which the character lamp selected by lottery when the effect button 62 is pressed, there is one variable display. There may be a timing when the character lamp is turned on a plurality of times. For this reason, the earliest timing is used for lighting the character lamp, and the sub CPU 201 performs control so that once it is lit, it is not lit thereafter.

  162 (A) to 162 (C) are sequence charts showing an example of character lamp lighting control. 162 (A) to 162 (C), the first effect lottery is executed at the start of variable display as the effect between the start of variable display of the identification symbol and the end of variable display. Is executed, and a second effect lottery is executed in the middle, and as a result, special reach (hereinafter referred to as “SP reach”) is executed in the second half.

  The example shown in FIG. 162A represents a case where the lamp lighting timing is selected twice during one variable display. In the example shown in the figure, the character lamp effect execution period exists in the first half conversation notice, and the character lamp effect execution period also exists in the second half SP reach.

  The example shown in FIG. 162 (B) represents a case where the effect button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect in response to the press of the effect button 62 in the first half of the conversation notice, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the second half of the SP reach.

  The example shown in FIG. 162 (C) represents a case where the effect button 62 is not pressed. In the illustrated example, the effect button 62 is not pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, while the sub CPU 201 indicates that the character lamp effect is executed in the second half SP reach.

  If it is determined that the character lamp is to be turned on when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of the button effect, the character lamp is not lit and then identified. Although it is conceivable that the variable display of symbols ends, it is possible to execute separately the lottery for the effect that the character lamps that are selected at the start of the variable display are turned on, and the lottery for lighting the character lamps when the effect button 62 is pressed. Thus, various lighting timings of the character lamp can be prepared.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the control process of the character lamp effect. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is during variable display (step S801). If the effect is not during variable display, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is ended (step S807), while variable display. If it is the medium effect, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is ended when the character lamp effect is not executable (step S807), while the character lamp flag is 1 when it is the character lamp effect execution period. It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

  When the character lamp flag is 1 (character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is ended (step S807), while when the character lamp flag is not 1 (character lamp effect is not yet performed). For execution, it is determined whether or not the execution condition for the character lamp effect is satisfied (step S804). The execution condition of the character lamp effect means, for example, that the effect button 62 is pressed or a predetermined variable display time elapses.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is ended when the execution condition for the character lamp effect is not satisfied (step S807), and executes the character lamp effect when the execution condition for the character lamp effect is satisfied. (Step S805).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not variable display ends (step S807). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display has not ended, the sub CPU 201 ends the process, whereas if it determines that the variable display has ended, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 0 (step S808).

  The above contents are described as an embodiment with variable display being taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the character lamp effect is controlled by using the pre-reading effect or the pre-reading effect + the variable display effect as one period. You may make it do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), when the effect button 62 is operated, as a specific notification mode, for example, a conversation notice that can execute a character lamp effect (first effect execution) Means) and SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing the character lamp effect when the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), in the conversation notice, when the operation of the effect button 62 is not performed, the character lamp effect is not executed, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 162 (C). When the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 162 (C), the character lamp effect is not executed in the conversation notice. Perform the production.

  In other words, the following can also be said. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and perform a lottery to execute the character lamp effect under the first condition (for example, when the effect button 62 is pressed). Each of the first lottery that can be performed and the second lottery that can perform a lottery executed under a second condition (for example, time elapse) different from the first lottery can be executed. When each of the above becomes feasible, the first condition may not be satisfied depending on the game situation. When the first condition is established, the character lamp effect can be executed under the establishment of the first condition, the establishment under the second condition is invalidated, and the case where the first condition is not established and invalid Only at times, when the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect can be executed, for example, at an execution timing different from that of the first condition.

  In other words, the following can also be said. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as a first condition, for example, when the button shown in FIG. 162 (A) is pressed. Each can be executed by the first lottery that can perform the lottery and the second lottery that can perform the lottery executed at the time of FIG. 162 (A) as the second condition different from the first lottery. sell. When each of the above becomes feasible, the character lamp effect is executed when the second condition is satisfied, while the first condition is a condition that becomes unsatisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), when the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed when the first condition is satisfied, and the second condition is satisfied. Is invalid (or discarded).

[Full screen notice]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the control of the full screen effect, and FIGS. 165A to 165C are screen diagrams illustrating examples of the screen display. In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command indicating that the full screen effect should be executed in the normal effect state shown in FIG. 165A, it outputs a message (effect designation information) to the audio control circuit 205. As a result, the sound control circuit 205 is controlled, and the volume of the specific channel (the channel on which the design sound is reproduced) is set to zero.

  Note that the voice control circuit 205 controls not to output the design sound during full-screen presentation, but the error screen after the interruption of power interruption (that is, the full-screen error screen indicating that variable display is being performed). ) Is controlled to output symbol sounds.

  However, in this example, the error screen on the full screen is the error screen after the power is restored, but the error screen on the full screen is not necessarily the error screen after the power is restored. For example, when an error occurs This includes information screens related to gaming machines that are not related to jackpot determination, such as message screens of, and warning screens when fraud is performed, in a way that displays variable screens of identification symbols in a way that is not visible. .

  The voice control circuit 205 has, for example, a sound source of four channels (execution system) for performing voice control such as notification sound, design sound, sound effect, and BGM, and is based on a message (effect designation information) from the sub CPU 201. For example, these can be reproduced by four channels (execution system). In this embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel. For example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a design sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is BGM. is there.

  Describing along the flowchart shown in FIG. 164, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a full screen effect is being executed (step S901), and if it is not a full screen effect, the process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the full screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power interruption recovery is as shown in FIG. 165 (B) (step S902).

  If the power interruption is not restored, the sub CPU 201 sets full screen effect (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message designating the channel number 2 which is a design sound channel to the sound control circuit 205, and sets the sound volume of the design sound channel to 0 to the sound control circuit 205 which has received the message. (Step S904).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), in the case of power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets a screen during power failure recovery (step S905). This is because the effect is not stored at the time of power failure recovery, and a screen during power failure recovery is simply displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205, and causes the voice control circuit 205 to receive the message to output the volume of the symbol channel for the symbol number 2 of the symbol sound (step S906). This may be changed to a sound larger than the stop sound of the symbol at the time of normal performance.

  In the process as described above, the sound of the design is not made during the full screen production as the production, but after that, when the power interruption occurs, the full screen production command is transmitted again. In such a case, by controlling so that the volume of the design sound channel (channel number: 2) can be output, the power recovery screen is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled. Even when the displayed identification symbol is not visible, it is possible to grasp that the identification symbol has been stopped by the symbol stop sound.

  In other words, in the case of a display effect, an effect sound color can be output by a plurality of channels according to the system, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) can be selected in accordance with the change in the display effect. While changing the effect sound color output from the three, four and four symbol sound channels, the sound effect channel and the BGM channel, the symbol system channel (for example, the channel of the symbol of channel number 2) is fixed. The sound output from the channel of the symbol system is muted according to the symbol display mode.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce processing that is not necessary for the production while enhancing the interest of the player in the production, so that the processing can be performed smoothly.

  Further, from the viewpoint of the embodiment as described above, it is produced by a plurality of channels, for example, the channel of the notification sound of channel numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4, the channel of the design sound, the channel of the sound effect, and the channel of the BGM. A shared channel that can output the timbre according to the system and can change the timbre that is output from the channel according to the change of the display effect, for example, the channel with the channel numbers 2, 3, and 4 There are sound channels, BGM channels, warning channels and design channels, for example, channel numbers 1 and 2 for notification sound and design sound channels, and effect sound colors through shared channels according to the display effect mode On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, a full screen display shown in FIG. With Yan'neru state is maintained, the output sound from the channel symbol system can also be referred to as a mute.

  In the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the channel number of the design sound channel is fixed to 2 is exemplified (hereinafter also referred to as “fixed channel system”). Based on a message (production designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an unused channel out of four channels (execution system) may be dynamically assigned to reproduce each sound.

  In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel that reproduces the design sound. For example, when executing the full screen effect, the sub CPU 201 instructs the audio control circuit 206 to execute the specific channel. A message designating a number is transmitted, and the sound control circuit 206 receiving the message is caused to set the volume of the design sound channel to zero. Even if it does in this way, the same effect as a fixed channel system can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) that controls the performance to be performed, and the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number of symbol effect executions (for example, temporary variation) to be performed and one or more start memories stored by the holding means are specified. When the start memory (reach or jackpot) is included, effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) that can determine the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. ), And the effect mode determining means displays the number of symbol effects of the execution number determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. An effect mode (for example, key) performed during execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start-up memory. The specific effect determining means for determining a subtraction effect) of Rakuta (e.g., characterized by having a step S372, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific start-up memory is included in one or more start-up memories stored by the holding means, until the variable display for the specific start-up memory is performed Can be determined before the variable display is started, so that even if the data capacity is large, smoothness can be determined. Processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are visually displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, while further enhancing the effect, Smooth processing can be performed.

  Note that if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. However, when the result of the winning determination is out of the way, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is performed thereafter (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), The player's interest will be reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory that is variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the first specific start memory Since it did in this way, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means controls to prevent an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means from being displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. And

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When there is not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined as the start memory. Although it is not the specific start memory, it has suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358 etc.) that determines the effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, The suggestion effect determination means suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific aspect when the start memory is not stored by the holding means. Characterized in that it is configured so as not be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the rendering mode for the last stored startup memory among the startup memories stored by the holding means is not a specific startup memory. By determining the effect mode, the player's expectation for the display effect can be maintained. In addition, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the production mode suggesting that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is not determined, so that the control load is not increased.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls the performance to be performed, and the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects to be performed (for example, temporary variation), and effects for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means An effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) that can determine the mode, and the effect mode determining means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effects to be executed is divided into predetermined units, and an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. The specific start-up determination means (for example, step S370) and the specific start-up memory are included in one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the holding means. When it is not, the effect mode is determined for all start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold means is Even if the start memory is not the specific start memory, the suggestion effect determination is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a gaze reach sign effect) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. Means (for example, step S358), and the suggestion effect determination means suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode when the start memory is not stored by the holding means. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured not to be determined as a production mode.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if it is, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are visually displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, while further enhancing the effect, Smooth processing can be performed.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all start memories stored by the holding unit, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold unit is determined as the start mode. Although the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained by determining the effect mode to suggest that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode. ing.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, based on the start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the start opening, A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) is configured such that a game ball wins at the start opening. The design memory is configured to be able to hold the start memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the start memory stored in the hold means when a game ball wins the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect for is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, the symbol effect for each start memory is not increased without increasing the overhead load. The number of executions can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform processing smoothly while enhancing the effect.

(1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a start port provided in the game area (for example, the second start port 440) and a display in which the variable display of the identification symbol is performed based on the reception of the game ball at the start port Means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for symbol determination, etc.) are stored as a predetermined number (for example, four) ) Can be stored until the first storage mode (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the start memory stored by the holding unit when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. The first effect mode determining means for setting the effect data relating to the determined first effect mode, and the start stored by the holding means when a game ball is received at the start port Second effect mode determining means for determining a second effect mode for memory and setting the effect data relating to the determined second effect mode, wherein the second effect mode determining means includes the first effect mode determining means. The second effect mode is determined using effect data according to the first effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second rendering mode in which the rendering mode is determined for the start memory stored by the holding unit when the game ball is received at the starting port is stored by the holding unit. Although there is no time in order to display it immediately, the first effect mode is determined based on the start-up memory stored by the holding means when the identification symbol is variably displayed. Since the effect data is used for the determination, smooth processing can be performed even if the data capacity is large.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number is further provided, and the first effect mode determining means is the symbol effect execution number determining means for the start-up memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect determined by the above is divided into a predetermined unit, and an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory is determined. It is characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, it is possible to display a variable display for one start memory. In appearance, it looks as if variable display for a plurality of startup memories is being performed, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect It becomes.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform processing smoothly while enhancing the effect.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memories. When the variable display is performed for the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four) and one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is stored. Display control means (for example, a step control unit) that controls the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. And a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. ) And the gaming state after the special game is executed can be controlled over a different period each time to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state or a high probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. And an effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display effect displayed on the display means, and the effect control means has an index having a predetermined degree of expectation regarding the gaming state. At least the number of executions of the effect (character subtraction effect) and the execution timing for executing the index effect in any variable display in the advantageous gaming state are at least The advantageous game according to information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, information about whether or not the gaming state is a high probability gaming state) and a period (for example, the number of short times) controlled in the advantageous gaming state. Production predetermining means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) determined before being controlled by the state, and one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state Specific effect determining means (for example, step S370) for determining the effect mode, and the specific effect determining means executes the index effect in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the index start memory to be executed is included, the index effect is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect pre-determining means, and one of the one or more start memories is included. It is characterized by having an effect redetermining means (for example, step S358 and the like) for deciding to execute the variable display related to the start memory.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the index effect having a predetermined expectation level regarding the game state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, but the execution timing of the index effect is the advantageous game state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the start memory for the indicator effect is not yet held, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is selected from one or a plurality of start memories. It is determined again to be executed in the variable display related to any start memory. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by a smooth process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is the Mth variable display in the game state after the special game is executed. When the predetermined number that can be stored as start-up memory by the holding means is N, the effect re-determining means replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect pre-deciding means. In the variable display at any timing in the range of [M− (predetermined number N−1)] to [M + (predetermined number N−1)] in the gaming state after the special game is executed. It is determined that the indicator effect is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect redetermining means is determined without greatly deviating from the execution timing of the index effect determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Specific start determination means (for example, step S330, etc.) for determining whether or not it is determined, and the effect re-determination means is the specific start storage stored in one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means. When it is determined that the variable display is included, it is determined that any variable display among the start memories until the variable display related to the specific start memory is performed is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), The indicator effect can be performed by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the user. That is, if the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, it is necessary to re-determine the production mode, and the control burden may increase. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. Since the production mode is determined, the control burden can be reduced as much as possible.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is suppressing the fall of interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform processing smoothly.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memories. When the variable display is performed with respect to the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can be stored up to the number, and one start memory stored by the hold means, the next start memory after the one start memory Display control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed. , A special game state executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result, and after the special game is executed An advantageous state control means capable of controlling the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state over a different period each time, Information related to at least the game state of the advantageous gaming state, the number of times of execution of the indicator effect having the degree of expectation (character subtraction effect) and the execution timing of the variable effect display in the advantageous gaming state. (E.g., information on whether or not the game state is a high probability game state) and the period (e.g., the number of times reduced) that is controlled in the advantageous game state. For the effect predetermining means (for example, the scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) determined before being controlled to the gaming state and the start memory stored by the holding means, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol The symbol production execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) to be performed, and one or more stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state Effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) that can determine the effect mode for the start memory, and the effect mode determining means includes one or more start memories stored by the holding means. Among them, an index effect execution determining means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not an index start memory for executing the index effect is included, and the holding hand When the indicator effect execution determining means determines that the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the stage, the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is Instead, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and in which symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, the index effect is executed. And an effect re-determination means (for example, step S358).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the index effect having a predetermined expectation level regarding the game state is executed in the game state after the special game state is executed, but the execution timing of the index effect is , Determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the start memory for the indicator effect is not yet held, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is selected from one or a plurality of start memories. It is determined again to be executed in the variable display related to any start memory. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by a smooth process.

  Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of start memories are externally displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It can be seen as if variable display is being performed, and the production effect can be enhanced. Moreover, since the determined number of executions of symbol effects is divided into predetermined units and the index effects are executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effects.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the index effect execution determination means includes an index start memory for executing the index effect in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined until which of the plurality of start memories the indicator effect is executed. It is characterized by not being configured.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the index start memory is included, but any of the plurality of start memories is included. Since it is not determined whether or not the index production is executed by the start memory, the production effect can be enhanced without increasing the control load. It is determined by the effect predetermining means that even if the index start memory is included in the plurality of start memories, it is not determined which one of the plurality of start memories executes the index effect. This is because the execution timing is determined again.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (2), the effect mode determining means is a specific start in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When memory (reach or jackpot) is included, it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. .

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variablely displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. However, when the result of the winning determination is out of the way, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is performed thereafter (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), The player's interest will be reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (reach or big hit), the specific start memory Decreasing interest because the aspect of the start memory until the variable display is determined is determined, and the start aspect is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the specific start memory Can be suppressed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memories. When the variable display is performed with respect to the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can be stored up to the number, and one start memory stored by the hold means, the next start memory after the one start memory Display control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed. , Special game state execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result, and the special Advantageous state control means capable of controlling the game state after the game has been executed to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a short-time game state or a high-probability game state) over a different period each time. And the number of executions of the index effect (character subtraction effect) having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state and the execution timing for executing the index effect in any variable display in the advantageous gaming state, at least the advantageous game Information related to the gaming state of the state (for example, information about whether or not it is a high probability gaming state) and a period of time controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, In accordance with the time-saving number), the effect prior determination means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, and the start-up memory stored by the holding means In the advantageous gaming state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, Production mode determination means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the production mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, and relatively high expectation for the index production A first index effect having a degree (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a second index effect having a lower expectation level than the first index effect (for example, a reduction in friend characters) Calculation effect) is included, and the effect advance determination means determines execution timing for each of the first index effect and the second index effect, and the effect mode determination means The one or more start memories stored by the means include a first index start memory for executing the first index effect and / or a second index start memory for executing the second index effect. Index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not the first index start memory and / or the second index start in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means When the indicator effect execution determination means determines that the memory is included, instead of the execution timing determined by the effect advance determination means The number of executions of the symbol effect determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into a predetermined unit, and in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined unit, the first index effect and / or the second index effect. And effect re-deciding means (for example, step S358 etc.) for deciding whether or not to execute.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as an index effect having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state, a first index effect having a relatively high expectation level and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect A second index effect having a degree is prepared. The first index effect and the second index effect are both executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, but the execution timing of the first index effect or / and the second index effect is the advantageous game state. Determined before being controlled. For this reason, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the first index effect or / and the second index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the start memory for the first indicator effect or / and the second indicator effect has not yet been put on hold, so it may be advantageous depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to perform the first index effect or / and the second index effect at the execution timing determined before being controlled to the gaming state. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first index effect or / and the second index effect is set. Further, it is determined again to be executed in the variable display related to one of the one or a plurality of start memories. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be performed by a smooth process. In addition, it is preferable that the execution order of the first index effect or / and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained in the redetermination of the execution timing of the first index effect or / and the second index effect. .

  Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of start memories are externally displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It can be seen as if variable display is being performed, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into a predetermined unit, and the first index effect or / and the second index effect are executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined unit. The effect can be increased.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the index effect execution determination means includes the first index start memory and / or the first start memory stored in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means. Although it is determined whether or not two index start memories are included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, any one of the plurality of start memories has the first index effect or It is configured not to determine whether or not the second index effect is executed, and the first index start memory and the second index start are stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When both of the memories are included, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index start memory and / or the second index start memory is included. However, since it is not determined in which start memory the first index effect or / and the second index effect is executed among a plurality of start memories, the effect on the effect is enhanced without increasing the control load. be able to. It is not determined until the first index effect or / and the second index effect is executed in which start memory among the plurality of start memories. The first index memory and / or the second index are included in the plurality of start memories. This is because even if the memory is included, the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is re-determined. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect I am trying to judge. This is because the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained when redetermining the execution timing of the first index effect and the second index effect. It is.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means is a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Is included, it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variablely displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. However, when the result of the winning determination is out of the way, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is performed thereafter (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), The player's interest will be reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (reach or big hit), the specific start memory Decreasing interest because the aspect of the start memory until the variable display is determined is determined, and the start aspect is not determined for the start memory variably displayed after the specific start memory Can be suppressed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memories. When the variable display is performed for the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four) and one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is stored. Display control means (for example, a step control unit) that controls the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. And a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. ) And an advantageous state control means capable of controlling the gaming state after the execution of the special game to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state or a high probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (For example, step S171) and the start memory stored by the holding means can determine the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. Design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) and one or a plurality of start modes stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state can be determined. And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372), wherein the effect mode determining means divides the number of symbol effects determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and Regardless of the unit of the start memory, a specific effect determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that determines an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit, an index effect having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state A specific effect (one or a plurality of start memories stored by the timing determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136), step S370, etc.) and the holding means) for determining the execution timing of (subtraction effect). For example, a specific start memory in which reach fluctuation is executed is included, and the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect Are not duplicated, the specific effect is included in the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) determined for each of the one or more start memories stored by the holding means. Subtract the number of executions of the symbol effect where the index effect is performed from the number of executions of the symbol effect until the execution, and execute the suggestion effect (reach sign) that suggests that the specific effect is performed prior to the specific effect It has a suggestion effect execution determining means (for example, step S358 etc.) which determines the number of possible symbol effects.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if it is, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are visually displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if the variable display for the memory is being performed, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, while further enhancing the effect, Smooth processing can be performed.

  Further, although the specific start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific effect related to the specific start memory and the execution timing of the index effect do not overlap. In this case, the number of symbol effects that can be executed as an indication effect (reach sign) is determined by subtracting the number of executions of index effects from the total number of symbol effects performed until the specific effect is executed. Therefore, for any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestion effect, the execution timing can be determined before the variable display is started, so that smooth processing can be performed. In addition, since the index effect and the suggestion effect can be executed at a suitable timing, the effect can be enhanced.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggestion effect execution determining means includes the specific start memory in one or more start memories stored by the holding means and When the execution timing and the execution timing of the indicator effect overlap, execution of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or more start memories stored by the holding means The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effect where the index effect is performed is subtracted from the total number of numbers to determine the number of symbol effects that can be executed for the suggestion effect (a sign of reach) performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution time of the specific effect and the execution time of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed when the specific effect is executed. Since the specific effect and the index effect are performed in duplicate from the flow of the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol determination random number value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory, and the display Special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and an effect executed in the gaming state after the special game is executed As a first index effect (for example, an enemy character subtraction effect) having a relatively high expectation level and a second index effect (for example, an expectation level relatively lower than the first index effect) (for example, At least a teammate character subtraction effect) is prepared, and an index effect timing determination means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) for determining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. S370, etc.), the specific effect (for example, reach effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner, and the first index effect or / and the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. Duplication judgment means for judging whether or not (for example, step S346 and the like), presentation mode determination means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining the production mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, The effect mode determining means is performed in the variable display in which the specific effect and the first index effect are the same. Is determined, first effect mode determining means (for example, step S350) for determining that the first index effect is to be performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed, and the specific effect and the second index effect are determined. And a second effect mode determining means for determining that the second index effect is not performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed when it is determined that the second effect is performed in the same variable display. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as an index effect having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state, a first index effect having a relatively high expectation level and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect A second index effect having a degree is prepared. Further, it is determined whether or not the first index effect or / and the second index effect is executed when a specific effect (for example, a reach effect) is being performed. Here, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is being performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is being performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, both effects can give a relatively high expectation to the player. Indicator production is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during execution of variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display with a higher expectation level, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. For this reason, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the production effect is suitably enhanced.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one. The “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number and the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means are divided into predetermined units, and the start memory unit Regardless of the specific effect determination means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for determining the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the effect mode determination means Prior to the production, suggestion production execution decision means (for example, step S3) that determines the number of symbol productions that can be performed to suggest the specific production is performed. And having 8, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the suggestion effect (reach sign) suggesting that the specific effect is performed is executed prior to the specific effect, the effect can be further enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, if the type of production is increased, the production effect can be enhanced, but for example, data such as video has a large data capacity, so if the production is not performed effectively, not only the interest is reduced, but the control load increases, It is not preferable.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the gaming machine which can perform an effect effectively.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is identified based on a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a winning determination (for example, a jackpot determination) based on a predetermined condition being satisfied, and a result of the winning determination. Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) in which symbols are variably displayed, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for determining big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) As for the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) and the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory It is determined whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a black effect) having a predetermined expectation with respect to the result of the winning determination for the start memory, and for the specific start memory First effect execution determining means (for example, step S205) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect, and an effect different from the first effect, the start stored by the holding means Among the memories, all the second effects (for example, movable accessory effects) having a predetermined expectation with respect to the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory stored last are stored by the holding means. Second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205) for determining whether or not to execute the start memory, and determining that the first effect is not executed for the specific start memory, A second effect non-execution determining means for changing the second effect so as not to be executed with respect to the specific start memory when it is determined that the second effect is to be executed with respect to the specific start memory; Prepare And wherein the door.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not executed for the specific start memory even if it is determined that the second effect is executed for the specific start memory. Is changed so as not to execute the second effect with respect to the specific start-up memory, there is no need to perform a meaningless effect, and not only is the interest reduced, but the effect is effectively performed. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, if it is determined not to execute the first effect for a specific start memory, Expectation is not so high. Therefore, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for a specific start-up memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing the second effect so that it is not executed. This is an effective production.

  Note that “execution of the first effect (second effect) with respect to the start memory” refers to the first effect (second effect) that changes the hold effect image itself indicating that the start memory is stored. Executing the first effect (second effect) on the hold effect image indicating that the start memory is stored, and the first effect (when the variable display about the start memory is being performed) This is to include both of the execution of the second effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory is lost for the start memory different from the specific start memory. A third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205) for confirming whether or not to execute a third effect having a predetermined expectation level with respect to the determination result is further provided, and the first effect is executed. When the determination means determines that the third effect is to be executed with respect to the pre-start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory, the specific start memory and the pre-start Whether or not to execute the first effect is determined with respect to the start memory between the memory and the memory.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific start memory and the destination are determined without determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the start memory for which execution of the third effect is determined. Since the first effect is executed for the start memory between the start memory and the start memory, an effective effect can be performed without increasing the control load.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can perform an effect effectively can be provided.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, if the type of production is increased, the production effect can be enhanced, but for example, data such as video has a large data capacity, so if the production is not performed effectively, not only the interest is reduced, but the control load increases, It is not preferable.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the gaming machine which can perform an effect effectively.

(1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on a predetermined condition being established, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) in which the variable display is performed, and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination and the random number value for symbol determination) are used as start-up memory. Preservation means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and a win for a specific start memory that has been held last among the start memories held by the hold means A first effect (for example, a countdown effect) that can suggest the result of the determination is obtained from the variable display of the start memory stored before the specific start memory. A first effect execution determination means (for example, step S205) that determines whether or not to continue execution until the variable display for the start memory, and at least when the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. A second determination is made separately from whether or not to execute the first effect, whether or not to execute a second effect (for example, a movable accessory effect) that may suggest a result of the winning determination for the specific start-up memory. An execution execution determining means (for example, step S205), wherein the first effect executed from the variable display of the start memory stored before the specific start memory is the When it is continuously executed up to the variable display for a specific start memory, it is determined that the result of the winning judgment for the specific start memory is a win or is likely to be a win. At the same time, when the variable display for the specific start-up memory is not continuously executed, it is likely that the result of the winning determination for the specific start-up memory is out of place or is out of place. It is determined that the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific start memory, and the second effect is executed in the variable display for the specific start memory. When the effect is determined, a second effect non-execution determining means (for example, step S205) for changing the second effect so that the second effect is not executed in the variable display of the specific start memory is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is determined that the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the fixed start memory, and the second effect is executed in the variable display for the specific start memory. When it is decided to do so, it is changed so as not to execute the second effect in the variable display about the specific start memory, so there is no need to perform a meaningless effect, and not only a decrease in interest is suppressed, It is possible to perform the production effectively. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific start memory, it is highly likely that the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory is out of date or is out of place. . Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display of the specific start-up memory, not only a meaningless effect is performed, but there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second effect is to be executed in the variable display for the specific start-up memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing the second effect so as not to be executed. It is intended to perform a typical production.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can perform an effect effectively can be provided.

[Appendix 11]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image. Display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination, and a predetermined effect. And a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the sound to be output, wherein the display control means has a predetermined expectation for the result of the winning determination. As an effect, a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) for controlling the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the change effect of the identification symbol, and the change of the identification symbol Information display control means (for example, step S905) for controlling the display means to display an information image related to the gaming machine without displaying the output, and the sound output control means is configured to control the specific effect control. When the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the means, the mute device (for example, step S904) that does not output the variation sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the information image display control device generates the variation effect of the identification symbol. When not displayed, it has a fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing is omitted without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. The information image related to the gaming machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is performed, a recovery screen after power interruption, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the information image display control means is cut off when a variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed as an information image related to the gaming machine, and then recovered. The restoration image (for example, FIG. 165 (C)) is displayed so as to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the restored image after the power interruption, it is possible to grasp that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed even if the restoration image is displayed and the variation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized. .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 12]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs a variable display of the identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) that shows the result of the winning determination when the identification symbol stops Device 16), operation means (effect button 62) that can be operated by the player, and execution of a specific effect based on the result of the winning determination based on the operation means being operated within a predetermined period. The first effect execution means (FIG. 162 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and the specific effect execution lottery based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Second effect executing means (FIG. 162 (C)) for executing the specific effect, and the first effect executing means executes the specific effect when the operation means is not operated within the predetermined period. Without said The second effect execution means does not execute the specific effect when the first effect execution means is executed by the first effect execution means within the same variable display, while the operation means has not been operated within the predetermined period. Thus, when the specific effect is not executed by the first effect executing means, the specific effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation means is not operated, the specific notification mode is not executed, and when the specific notification mode is executed, the specific notification mode is further set. Never executed. On the other hand, when a specific notification mode is not yet executed, a specific notification mode can be executed. Thereby, unnecessary processing can be omitted without a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines in which symbols are variably displayed and the results of the game are shown when the symbols are stopped and displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four symbol variable displays are held as start memory, and variable display is performed for each start memory.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that enhances the effect of the effect by performing a display effect that expects that a special game may be performed before the result of the game is displayed (for example, No. 2006-246964).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs display effects only on the start memory unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform special games, There is a possibility that the expectation is lost with respect to the variable display of the symbols, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. The display control means for controlling the effect to be performed, and the symbol effect (for example, the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means (for example, (Variation) execution number determining means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number of executions, and one or more start memories stored by the holding means, a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation effect) Is included, for example, step S332 or the like, which can determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed. ), And when the plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means is the most of the plurality of specific start memories. An effect mode for the start memory until variable display is performed for the earliest specific start memory for which variable display is performed first is determined, and the earliest specific start memory is determined The unit of the start memory is divided into predetermined units for the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means with respect to the start memory until variable display is performed. Regardless of whether or not there is a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is not good, even if there is an effect mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), such effect The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory that is variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the first specific start memory Since it did in this way, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means controls to prevent an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means from being displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is what.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When there is not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined as the start memory. Is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a harsh reach sign effect) that suggests that the change effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), even though it is not the specific start memory. The suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S366), and the suggestion effect determining means, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, Characterized in that it is configured so as not to determine the suggested representation embodiment the effect that the fluctuation effect of identification symbols in modal is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the rendering mode for the last stored startup memory among the startup memories stored by the holding means is not a specific startup memory. By determining the effect mode, the player's expectation for the display effect can be maintained. In addition, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, since it is not determined to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, an increase in control load is also suppressed. .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines in which symbols are variably displayed and the results of the game are shown when the symbols are stopped and displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four symbol variable displays are held as start memory, and variable display is performed for each start memory.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that enhances the effect of the effect by performing a display effect that expects that a special game may be performed before the result of the game is displayed (for example, No. 2006-246964).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs display effects only on the start memory unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform special games, There is a possibility that the expectation is lost with respect to the variable display of the symbols, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random number for determining big hits or a symbol) The determination unit (such as a random number for determination) can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), for example, a holding unit (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one starting storage stored by the holding unit When the variable display is performed, display control means for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. (For example, the sub CPU 201) and the design effect (for example, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means) The design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number of executions of (variation), and the effect mode determination that can determine the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Means (for example, step S372), and the effect mode determining means displays the number of symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means. It is divided into predetermined units, and is stored by the specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start-up memory, and the storage means. Alternatively, when a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded) is not included in the plurality of start memories, all the memories stored by the holding means are stored. The presentation mode is determined with respect to the start memory, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is determined even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. , Characterized in that it has suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S356 etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a gaze reach sign effect) that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's sense of expectation for the display effect is maintained. There is a risk that it will be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the production mode is determined for all start memories stored by the holding means, and the last of the start memories stored by the hold means is stored (variable display is performed at the end). The player with respect to the display effect is determined by determining the effect mode with respect to the start memory to an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the start memory is not a specific start memory. The expectation of is maintained.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, based on the start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the start opening, A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) is configured such that a game ball wins at the start opening. The design memory is configured to be able to hold the start memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the start memory stored in the hold means when a game ball wins the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect for is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect by the movable body effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 15]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed to operate the movable body in order to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player. There is something that can be improved.

  As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by an expansion / contraction operation of a pantograph and the movable body is tilted at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph is started (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). reference).

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, for example, when the operation of the movable body is started, a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and tilting of the movable body can be grasped, and there is a limit to enhancing the effect. There was a possibility that the interest would decrease.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to raise a production effect by a movable body effect and to suppress the fall of an interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. The display control means for controlling the effect to be performed, and the symbol effect (for example, the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means (for example, The design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number of executions of (variation), and the effect mode determination that can determine the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Means (for example, step S372), and the effect mode determining means stores a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation effect) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the start memory) is not included, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined so that the number of start memories is different each time, and the start memory to be determined for the effect mode On the other hand, when determining the effect mode, the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, Regardless of the unit, a specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and a start memory stored by the holding means Among the effect modes for the last memorized start memory, the effect mode (for example, suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory) , A suggestive effect determining means (for example, step S356) for determining to be a harsh reach sign effect).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined to be different each time, and is stored last (of the variable display at the end) among the start memories stored by the holding means. Display) by determining the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory. The player's expectation for the production is maintained.

  In addition, the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined to be different each time because the number of start memories to be determined for the production mode is determined in a specific manner. It is not easy to grasp that the variable display is not performed (even if the production mode suggesting that the variation display of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is displayed). It is to make it.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, based on the start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the start opening, Fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, step S57) for determining a fluctuation pattern when variable display is performed, and the holding means stores the start memory based on a game ball winning at the start opening. The symbol effect execution number determination means determines the number of symbol effect executions for the start memory stored in the hold means when a game ball wins the start opening. The determination is made based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect by the movable body effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol determination random number value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory, and the display When a specific result is displayed on the means, special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the special game is executed As an effect executed in the gaming state, an index effect timing determining means (for example, an execution timing of an index effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state is determined in advance. Scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136), etc., effect mode determining means (for example, step S374) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start-up memories stored by the holding means, and the holding means Among the one or more start memories stored in the above, a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect) and an index start memory in which the index effect is performed are included. Production information determination means (for example, step S346, etc.) for determining whether or not the production mode determination means stores the index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When it is included, the index effect is replaced with the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means, and the one or more start-up memories are stored. There is an effect redetermining means (for example, step S372) that decides to execute in the variable display related to any start memory, and the effect redetermining means is one or more start memorized by the holding means. When the effect information determining means determines that the specific start memory and the index start memory are included in the memory, the execution is determined regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determining means. It is characterized in that it is possible to determine that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index effect is large, there is a time margin until the index effect is performed. Can be performed. Further, when the specific start memory and the index start memory are included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding unit, the specific start memory is included regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination unit. Since it is determined that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the start memory, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In other words, when an index effect is performed during execution of variable display performed in a specific mode, if the index effect has a relatively low degree of expectation that can be obtained with respect to such an index effect, a player is displayed on the variable display. Is difficult to expect. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display with a higher expectation level, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, an index effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific start memory. By doing so, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the effect mode determining means includes the specific start memory (reach or jackpot) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. In this case, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), A decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is not good, even if there is an effect mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), such effect The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory (reach or jackpot), the specific start memory Since the effect mode with respect to the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol determination random number value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory, and the display Special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a start-up memory stored by the holding means On the other hand, a design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. As an effect executed in the gaming state after the special game is executed, a first index effect (for example, an enemy character subtraction effect) having a relatively high degree of expectation is more relative to the first index effect. At least a second index effect having a low degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of a teammate character), and an index effect that determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect in advance. When the timing determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) and a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner, the first index effect is performed. Or / and an overlap determination means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the second index effect is performed, and the hold means. Effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory to be performed, wherein the effect mode determining means is the one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode. In determining the effect mode, the number of executions of the symbols determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, which are divided into the predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. A specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect, and when the duplicate determining means determines that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. By determining that the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the effect is performed, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized by having index presentation timing redetermining means (for example, step S358).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance, the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is a time margin before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display with a higher expectation level, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Thus, the production effect can be enhanced by performing the second index production in the symbol production before the specific production is performed.

  The first index effect is advantageous when it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function to notify that it is a high probability gaming state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is annihilated), for example, relatively It has a function of notifying that it is an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a low probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination unit determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The effect mode determining means determines the effect mode for the start-up memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in the gaming state after the special game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during the execution of the special game, so that smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol determination random number value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory, and the display A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and the start-up memory stored by the holding means; The symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed, and the special game is executed. As an effect executed in the game state (for example, the short-time game state), the first index effect (for example, the subtraction effect of the enemy character) having a relatively high expectation and the first index effect relatively At least a second index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of a teammate character) having a low degree of expectation is prepared, and an index effect timing determination for determining in advance the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. Whether the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner is performed. Overlapping judgment means for judging (for example, step S346), and a performance mode capable of determining the production mode for the start memory stored by the holding means. An aspect determining means (for example, step S372), and the effect aspect determining means determines the effect aspect for the one or more start memories to be determined for the effect aspect. The number of executions determined by the number-of-execution determining means is divided into predetermined units, and an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory is determined. A specific effect determining means (for example, step S372), and when the duplicate determining means determines that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, rather than the specific effect being performed. By determining that the second index effect is performed in the previous symbol effect, the index performance is performed so that the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. When the overlap determination unit determines that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the specific effect is performed. The first index production is sometimes performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance, the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is a time margin before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. In addition, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation in the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display is developed into a variable display with a higher expectation level, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Thus, the production effect can be enhanced by performing the second index production in the symbol production before the specific production is performed.

  The first index effect is advantageous when it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function to notify that it is a high probability gaming state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is annihilated), for example, relatively It has a function of notifying that it is an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a low probability gaming state).

  Further, when it is determined that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. This is because when a first indicator effect is performed during execution of variable display performed in a specific manner, the player is highly likely to have an expectation for the variable display. This is because the production effect is enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination unit determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The effect mode determining means determines the effect mode for the start-up memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in the gaming state after the special game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during the execution of the special game, so that smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol determination random number value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up memory, and the display Special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a start-up memory stored by the holding means On the other hand, a design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed. As an effect to be executed in the game state after the special game is executed, an index effect determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (for example, scenario pre-setting process)) that determines in advance the execution timing of the index effect having a predetermined expectation level for the game state 136)) and a duplicate determination means for determining whether or not the index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in a specific mode is performed. For example, step S346 and the like, and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for the start-up memory stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means In determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories to be determined, the symbol effect execution number determination means determines A specific effect determining means for dividing a given number of executions of the symbol effect into predetermined units and determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory; And when the specific effect is performed, when the overlap determining means determines that the index effect is not performed, the one or more start memories determined for the effect mode are determined. The suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is performed is executed prior to the specific effect only when the execution number of the symbol effect is obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of symbol effect executions. It has a suggestion effect execution determination means for determining the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index effect is large, there is a time margin until the index effect is performed. Can be performed. In addition, when it is determined that the index effect is not performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) is performed, the symbol effect determined for one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode The suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is performed is specified only when the execution number of the symbol effect is obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of Since it is executed prior to the production, it is possible to perform an effective production in which a specific production is expected by the suggestion production while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the suggestion effect execution determination unit executes the specific effect (for example, reach fluctuation) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. Each of the one or more start memories stored by the holding means when it is determined by the overlap determining means that the specific effect is included and the index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. Subtracted from the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined with respect to the number of executions of the symbol effect for which the index effect is performed, 1 is performed prior to the specific effect. The number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (a sign of reach) is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the overlap determination unit determines that the index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the suggestion effect is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific effect. Thus, a more effective performance can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), the game machine further includes a hold effect control unit that controls the display unit to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold unit. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

  According to the above gaming machine (3), since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the start memory unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the production mode without being limited by one game result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in a gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and a display control means (for example, a display control means for controlling to display at least a variation effect of the identification symbol). Display control circuit 204) and sound output control means (for example, sound control circuit 205) for controlling so that a predetermined effect sound is output, and the sound output control means systematizes effect sound colors by a plurality of channels. Can be output in accordance with the change of the effect sound color output from the channel in accordance with the change of the effect image displayed on the display means, while the channel of the identification symbol system is fixed. In addition, the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted according to the mode of variation effect of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing is omitted without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. The information image related to the gaming machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is performed, a recovery screen after power interruption, and the like.

  In the present invention, for example, the following configuration can be adopted as an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation for the result of the winning determination. That is, a gaming machine configured to be able to proceed with a game upon receiving power supply, a lottery means for making a winning determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, Display control means that executes control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol as the main effect, and that can execute control related to other effects as sub-effects, a speaker that outputs effect sound, and the display means. Sound output control means for controlling the production sound according to the production image to be output from the speaker, and the display control means as an production having a predetermined expectation for the result of the winning determination, The specific effect control means for executing the control related to the character effect as a main effect, and executing the control related to the change effect of the identification symbol as a sub-effect, and the variable effect of the identification symbol As an effect when the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restored after that, the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol is executed as a sub-effect. However, it has a return effect control means for controlling so that the effect image related to the return of the power supply is mainly displayed, and the sound output control means is when the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the specific effect control means. Does not output the fluctuating sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, but when the return effect control means does not display the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol, the fluctuating sound output control outputs the fluctuating sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol A gaming machine having means. Even in such a gaming machine, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. The main effect is an effect on the side that is the main subject of the effect and the player's attention is directed. The sub-effect is displayed on the display means together with the main effect, but the player's attention is It is a production on the side that is difficult to face.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received at the starting port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and when the symbol variation game is suspended and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. A gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and the possibility that the symbol variation game that has been held will be a big hit In some cases, the second button effect suggesting the above is performed (see, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

  In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the effect by increasing the types of effects.

  However, although the effect is enhanced when the type of effect is increased, it is required to process the effect in a short time as the game progresses. In particular, it takes more than a predetermined time to process data with a large data capacity, such as video data, for example, but even in such a case, it is required to be able to execute the process smoothly. It has been.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and is a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition. And a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed and a control related to the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination, and the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol can be executed. Display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) capable of executing the sound, a speaker (for example, the speaker 24) from which the effect sound is output, and the effect image displayed on the display means including the warning sound Sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the combined production sound to be output from the speaker, and the sound output control means is adapted to the result of the winning determination. When a specific effect having a degree of expectation is executed, a specific output control means for maintaining the output of the warning sound while muting the output of the variation effect of the identification symbol (for example, step S904) It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing is omitted without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and processing can be performed smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. The information image related to the gaming machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is performed, a recovery screen after power interruption, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to output effect timbres according to the system through a plurality of channels, and to produce effect timbres output from the channels in accordance with the effect images displayed on the display means. A changeable shared channel, a warning channel, and a channel of the identification symbol system, wherein the specific output control means changes the effect tone through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific effect is executed, the state of the channel of the warning system is maintained, and the output from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is silenced.

  The gaming machine of the above (2) more specifically shows the above (1), omits unnecessary processing without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, and smoothly processes while suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be performed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the fall of interest.

[Appendix 22]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a winning determination, display a variation of a symbol, and display a game result when the symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the next after a variable display is performed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) for controlling the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol before the variable display is performed, and the identification symbol for each variable display. Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) that can determine the number of symbol effect executions in which a variation effect and a stop effect are performed, and an effect mode determination that can determine an effect mode for a plurality of variable displays Means (for example, step S372), wherein the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and Division Specific effect determination means (e.g., step S372, etc.) to determine the effect manner a made during the design effect and having a.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined for each variable display. In other words, if one symbol effect is originally performed for each variable display, the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory, so one variable display ( Although it is a one-time game, it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (a plurality of games) are being performed on the appearance. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of game units. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in game units, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one game. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as an effect section, and is included in the effect section as a section effect performed in the effect section. In addition to determining the effect mode for the variable display, the number of symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the variable display included in the effect section is divided into predetermined units. Thus, there is provided a section effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the variable display.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, the player is further prevented from being aware of variable displays in game units. Can be.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the effect mode determining means includes a part of the number of symbol effects determined for one variable display included in the effect section, and the effect section. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to divide a part of the number of executions of symbol effects determined for other variable displays included in a predetermined unit across a plurality of variable displays. .

According to the gaming machine (3) above,
There is an effect mode that spans a part of a symbol effect determined for one variable display included in the effect section and a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for another variable display included in the effect section. It may be determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in game units, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by preventing the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 23]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a winning determination, display a variation of a symbol, and display a game result when the symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while preventing the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning judgment unit. .

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the presentation time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect to be performed, and the start stored by the holding means In contrast, the symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed, and the hold When a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more start memories stored by the means, the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed Effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode, and the effect mode determining means for the start memory until the variable display about the specific start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbols determined by the number of execution executions determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units are being executed regardless of the unit of the start memory. A specific effect determining unit that determines an effect mode to be performed, and the specific effect determining unit determines the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. An effect mode that spans the specific start memory and a start memory stored after the specific start memory, although an effect mode that straddles the start memory stored earlier and the specific start memory can be determined. It is characterized by not being determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is out of place, even if there is an effect that can give the player a high expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is performed) The player's interest in the performance mode is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory that is variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the first specific start memory Since it did in this way, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, the effect mode that straddles the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, an effect mode that straddles a specific start memory and a start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined. Thereby, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific manner rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variation effect can be expected. Can do.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a hold effect control unit that controls the image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, the hold effect control The means is characterized in that at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is controlled not to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When there is not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined as the start memory. Although there is no specific start-up memory, there is suggested suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358) that determines the effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode. It is what.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the rendering mode for the last stored startup memory among the startup memories stored by the holding means is not a specific startup memory. By determining the effect mode, the player's expectation for the display effect can be maintained.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not letting the player be aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a winning determination, display a variation of a symbol, and display a game result when the symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random number value, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as start-up memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one stored by the reservation means. When the variable display is performed for the start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be controlled and the start memory stored by the holding means. Determinable symbol effect execution number determining means stage (for example, step S324) and an effect mode determining means stage (for example, determining the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means) Step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means is stored by the holding means when the specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. In determining the production mode for all start memories and determining the production mode for all start memories stored by the holding means, the number of executions determined by the symbol production execution number determination means is determined. An effect mode that is performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (regardless of the start-up memory unit) by dividing the symbol effect into predetermined units. It characterized in that it has a specific effect determination means determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the start memory stored by the hold means Compared to the case where a specific start memory is included in the control load, there is less burden on control, and it is possible to determine the production mode for more start memories, so all the start memories stored by the holding means On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variation pattern for determining a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed based on a start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can be won and a winning of the game ball to the start opening Determination means (for example, step S173), and the holding means is configured to hold the start memory based on the winning of a game ball at the start port, and the number of symbol effect executions The determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the holding means when the game ball is won at the starting port by the variation pattern determining means. It is determined based on a fluctuation pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not letting the player be aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 25]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a winning determination, display a variation of a symbol, and display a game result when the symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random number value, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as start-up memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one stored by the reservation means. When the variable display is performed for the start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. The display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) to be controlled and the design in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means A design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions (for example, provisional fluctuation) and an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means are determined. Possible production mode determination means (for example, step S372), and the production mode determination means has a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the start memory in which the effect is recorded) is not included, the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding unit and stored by the holding unit. In determining the production mode for all start memories, the number of executions of the symbols determined by the symbol production execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units. The specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the holding means Suggestion to determine that the start pattern is an effect mode (for example, a gaze reach sign effect) that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory It has an effect determination means (for example, step S358 etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all start memories stored by the holding unit, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold unit is determined as the start mode. Although the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained by determining the effect mode to suggest that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode. ing.

  Note that if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. However, when the result of the winning determination is out of the way, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is performed thereafter (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), The player's interest will be reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory that is variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the first specific start memory Since it did in this way, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, based on the start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the start opening, A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) is configured such that a game ball wins at the start opening. The design memory is configured to be able to hold the start memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the start memory stored in the hold means when a game ball wins the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect for is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not letting the player be aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that perform a winning determination, display a variation of a symbol, and display a game result when the symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random number value, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as start-up memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one stored by the reservation means. When the variable display is performed for the start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be controlled and the start memory stored by the holding means. Determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Etc.), and the effect mode determining means is the target of determining the effect mode when the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When the number of start memories is determined so as to be different each time, the number-of-effects-determining means is determined by the number-of-design-execution-execution-number determining means when determining the effect mode for the start-up memory that is the target of determining the effect mode The specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit by dividing the number of executions of the symbol effect performed into predetermined units. And the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means, although the start memory is not the specific start memory, the identification symbol variation effect in the specific mode. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means for determining an effect mode that suggests that the action is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means. Is determined to be an effect mode that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner, even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, and the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. To be.

  The number of start memories to be determined in the production mode is determined to be different each time because the number of start memories to be determined in the production mode is changed in a specific manner. (Even if an effect mode that suggests that the variation display of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is displayed), it is not easily grasped Because.

  Note that if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the variable display is performed in a specific mode. However, when the result of the winning determination is out of the way, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is performed thereafter (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), The player's interest will be reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode for the start memory up to the first specific start memory that is variably displayed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the first specific start memory Since it did in this way, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the effect target number determining means determines the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. ), And the holding effect control means controls that the image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. Is.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not letting the player be aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 27]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is ended to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-2006). No. 122447).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning judgment must be lowered, There is a risk that interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination is determined as a normal game. Probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability ( For example, a secret effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for possible hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the hold means, variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory Display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the determination is performed, and at least control for promoting the winning determination is executed. In the gaming state, the change effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the execution number of pattern effects, and effect mode determining means capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. (For example, step S372), and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and uses them as a unit of the start memory. Regardless of having a specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, the specific effect determining means, when the secret effect is being executed, An effect mode (e.g., performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units) as indicating the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability For example, a character subtraction effect) is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the determination of winning is at least executed, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are produced with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is suppressed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination is moderated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-described effect mode, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means controls to prevent an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means from being displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is what.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress from the start of the control that promotes the winning judgment (that is, the number of start-up memories digested during the execution of the control that promotes the winning judgment (the game executed) Number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is further increased. The player can be made even less conscious.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means displays the variable display in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When the specific start memory to be performed is not included, the production mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the last stored among the start memories stored by the hold means A suggestion effect determining means (for example, determining an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the start memory is not the specific start memory) Step S358 etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the rendering mode for the last stored startup memory among the startup memories stored by the holding means is not a specific startup memory. By determining the effect mode, the player's expectation for the display effect can be maintained.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect by the movable body effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 28]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is ended to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-2006). No. 122447).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning judgment must be lowered, There is a risk that interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination is determined as a normal game. Probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability ( For example, concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing concealment A stage 2002) and hold means (for example, information about the variable display that has not been performed yet) can be stored as a start memory (for example, Step S54, Step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the holding means, the effect until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect to be performed using time, and a gaming state (for example, at least control for promoting the winning determination) (for example, In the short-time gaming state), with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are The number of symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of symbol effect executions (for example, temporary variation) to be performed and the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. Deciding presentation mode determining means (for example, step S372), and the presentation mode determining means divides the number of symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units. And a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory, and the specific effect determining means When the specific starting memory is stored by the holding means, the effect straddling the starting memory stored before the specific starting memory and the specific starting memory Although the mode can be determined, it is configured not to determine an effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory, and when the concealment effect is being executed The effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined as indicating the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. . .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the determination of winning is at least executed, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are produced with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is suppressed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination is moderated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-described effect mode, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  Further, in determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, it is stored (variably displayed first) prior to a specific start memory (for example, reach variation effect). An effect mode that straddles the start memory and the specific start memory can be determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, an effect mode that straddles a specific start memory and a start memory that is stored after the specific start memory (variably displayed later) is not determined. Thereby, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific manner rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variation effect can be expected. Can do. Here, the “specific start memory” corresponds to a start memory in which variable display is performed that can give the player a sense of expectation that the result of the winning determination is a specific result, such as reach fluctuation, for example. To do.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress from the start of the control that promotes the winning judgment (that is, the number of start-up memories digested during the execution of the control that promotes the winning judgment (the game executed) Number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is further increased. The player can be made even less conscious.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determination means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When there is not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold means is determined as the start memory. Although there is no specific start memory, there is suggested effect determining means (for example, step S358) that determines the effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode. Is.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory, it is not necessary to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner even though the rendering mode for the last stored startup memory among the startup memories stored by the holding means is not a specific startup memory. By determining the effect mode, the player's expectation for the display effect can be maintained.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from a special game, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 29]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is ended to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-2006). No. 122447).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning judgment must be lowered, There is a risk that interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination is determined as a normal game. Probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability ( For example, a secret effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for possible hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the hold means, variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory Display control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the event is performed, and at least control for promoting the winning determination is executed. In the gaming state, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the execution number of pattern effects, and effect mode determining means capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. (E.g., step S372), and the effect mode determining means is all stored by the holding means when no specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means. In determining the effect mode for the start memory, and determining the effect mode for all start memories stored by the holding means, the number of executions of the symbols determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is determined. The effect is determined by dividing the effect into predetermined units and determining the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. A gaming machine characterized by having fixed performance determining means (for example, step S372).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the determination of winning is at least executed, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are produced with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is suppressed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination is moderated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-described effect mode, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  By the way, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include the specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation), the start memory stored by the hold means Compared to the case where a specific start memory is included in the control load, there is less burden on control, and it is possible to determine the production mode for more start memories, so all the start memories stored by the holding means On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, based on the start opening (for example, the second start opening 440) in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the start opening, A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) is configured such that a game ball wins at the start opening. The design memory is configured to be able to hold the start memory, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) stores the start memory stored in the hold means when a game ball wins the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect for is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory. As a result, it is possible to make the player more difficult to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress from the start of the control that promotes the winning judgment (that is, the number of start-up memories digested during the execution of the control that promotes the winning judgment (the game executed) Number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is further increased. The player can be made even less conscious.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 30]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is ended to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-2006). No. 122447).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning judgment must be lowered, There is a risk that interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination A display device 16), which is capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result, A lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination compared to the state, and the winning probability in the winning determination is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, higher probability) Probability changing means that can be in a gaming state and a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 200) that does not explicitly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. ) And a holding means (e.g., step S205) and a hold means (e.g., 4) that can store up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Step S54, Step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the holding means, the effect until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed In a gaming state in which display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using time, and at least control for promoting the winning determination, are executed. The figure which determines the execution number of the symbol production in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Production execution number determining means (for example, step S324), production mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the production mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, And when the specific start memory is not included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means is configured for all start memories stored by the hold means. In determining the production mode and determining the production mode for all the start memories stored by the holding unit, the number of executions of the symbol production determined by the design production execution number decision unit is determined by a predetermined unit. The effect mode (for example, character reduction) performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (regardless of the unit of the start memory) A specific effect determining means for determining a calculation effect) and an effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the holding means, although the start memory is not the specific start memory. It has suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358 etc.) which determines to the effect mode (for example, Gase reach sign effect) which suggests that the change effect of the above-mentioned identification pattern is performed in the specific mode. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the determination of winning is at least executed, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are produced with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is suppressed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination is moderated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since the player can execute a display effect that is not conscious of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the winning determination (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-described effect mode, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's sense of expectation for the display effect is maintained. There is a risk that it will be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all start memories stored by the holding unit, and the effect mode for the start memory stored last among the start memories stored by the hold unit is determined as the start mode. Although the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained by determining the effect mode to suggest that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode. ing.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a variation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed on the basis of a start opening where a game ball can win and a winning of the game ball to the start opening And a variation pattern determining means (for example, step S173) for determining, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the start opening, The symbol effect execution number determining means determines the number of symbol effect executions for the start memory stored in the holding means when the game ball is won at the start opening. It is determined based on a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effect executions determined for the start-up memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect increases. If the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect decreases. Therefore, the variation in time required for one symbol effect is reduced, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are being executed for one start-up memory. As a result, it is possible to make the player more difficult to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning judgment is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is further increased. The player can be made even less conscious.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 31]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is ended to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a short-time gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-2006). No. 122447).

  However, in a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning judgment must be lowered, There is a risk that interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may be disadvantaged, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination is determined as a normal game. Probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability ( For example, a secret effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet are stored as a start memory up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When the variable display is performed for possible hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the hold means, variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory Display control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed using the effect time until the event is performed, and at least control for promoting the winning determination is executed. In the gaming state, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the execution number of pattern effects, and effect mode determining means capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. (For example, step S372), and the production mode determination unit is a specification in which the variation design of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit. When the start memory (reach or jackpot) is not included, the production target number determination means for determining the production mode for the different number of start memories among the start memories stored by the holding means, the production In determining the effect mode for the start memory to be determined, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units. Specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit (regardless of the unit of the start-up memory), and different each time Of the number of start memories, the effect mode for the last stored start memory suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having the suggestion production | presentation determination means (for example, step S358 etc.) determined to the production | generation aspect to perform (for example, Gase reach sign production).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) to be called is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is suppressed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination is moderated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that can be given to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since the player can execute a display effect that is not conscious of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the winning determination (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-described effect mode, and the decrease in interest can be further suppressed. It becomes.

  Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory that is variably displayed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's sense of expectation for the display effect is maintained. There is a risk that it will be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means. Is determined to be an effect mode that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner, even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, and the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. To be.

  The number of start memories to be determined in the production mode is determined to be different each time because the number of start memories to be determined in the production mode is changed in a specific manner. (Even if an effect mode that suggests that the variation display of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is displayed), it is not easily grasped Because.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the effect target number determining means determines the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image relating to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the variable display in the start memory unit is further prevented from being conscious of the player. Can do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 32]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is ended is set to a specific gaming state such as a short-time gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is concealed and determined in advance. A gaming machine is disclosed in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is obtained when the number of games played is exhausted (see, for example, JP 2009-240529 A).

  As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state have an effect that suggests the expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine in which a specific gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games is digested, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific gaming state simply by grasping the number of digested games. End up. When the end timing of a specific gaming state approaches, even if there is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of high probability, the expectation for high probability may be diminished and interest may be reduced .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means that is capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared to a normal gaming state until the winning determination is performed a predetermined number of times. Probability that the winning probability in the winning determination can be set to a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Further means and a concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Information about the variable display that has not yet been performed is stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start-up storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. In a gaming state in which display control means (e.g., the sub CPU 201) for controlling the display and at least the control for promoting the winning determination is executed The symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of symbol effect executions in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means; Effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determining means is the number of symbol effect executions A specification that divides the number of executions of the symbol effect determined by the determining means into predetermined units and determines an effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. It has an effect determination means (for example, step S372 etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the determination of winning is at least executed, the variation effect of the identification symbol and the stop effect are produced with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed is determined in advance, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

  The symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since the player can execute a display effect that is not conscious of the variable display in the start memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the winning determination (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. In addition, when the concealment effect is executed, the effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability Since the mode is determined, the player's consciousness can be directed to the above-described production mode rather than the remaining period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and further reduction in the interest can be suppressed. It becomes.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a hold effect control means for controlling the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means, the hold effect control means Is characterized in that at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, control is performed so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning judgment is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed). As a result, it is possible to give the player an interest in the indicator effect that can make the player expect the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high, and the timing of the end of the control that promotes the winning judgment is further increased. It can be made harder for the player to grasp.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the record holding means, the effect mode determining means is one of the plurality of start memories. Dividing a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory as a predetermined unit across a plurality of start memories And a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of start memories without being limited to one game result. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state.

[Appendix 33]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is ended is set to a specific gaming state such as a short-time gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is concealed and determined in advance. A gaming machine is disclosed in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is obtained when the number of games played is exhausted (see, for example, JP 2009-240529 A).

  Some of the gaming machines that conceal whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state as described above, are those that perform a highly suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine that conceals whether or not it is highly probable in a specific gaming state and performs a highly suggestive effect that suggests the expectation of high probability in the specific gaming state, If it is not, it is easy to select an effect with a low degree of expectation, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, the player is only given unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is not measured.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to give the display effect performed in a specific game state interesting, and to suppress the fall of an interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on establishment of a fixed condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result A lottery promotion control means (e.g., step S171) capable of executing a control (e.g., a short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared to a normal gaming state over a predetermined period, The winning probability in the winning determination is set to a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) compared to the normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. Providing a possible probability changing means and a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) capable of executing a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, and in the concealment period , An indicator effect execution means (for example, step S370) capable of executing an index effect that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, and the overall effect in the concealment period. A scenario determination unit (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) for determining a scenario of an index effect in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and the scenario determination unit includes the scenario determination unit, Whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is the high probability when the control for promoting the winning judgment ends. And determining the index presentation scenario as evidenced.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index effect performed as the overall performance in the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. The production scenario can be advanced. In other words, before the concealment period ends, if it is determined whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player by the indicator effect, it may be awakened. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to maintain interest in the index effect until the concealment period ends, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as startup memory; With respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means, a design effect execution number determining means (for example, a design effect execution number determining means capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary change) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed) Step S324, etc.) and production mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the production mode for one or more start-up memories stored by the holding means, and the production mode determination The means divides the number of symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means with respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means into predetermined units, The specific effect determining means for determining a representation embodiment made during the design effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the serial start memory (e.g., step S372, etc.) and has a.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the stop means. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  “Variable display” means a series of display from the start of the display of the variation of the identification symbol to the stop of the display for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), a hold effect control means (for example, a sub effect control means for controlling so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means is displayed in a predetermined display area. CPU201) is further provided, and the holding effect control means is controlled so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning judgment is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed). As a result, the player's interest can be given to the index effect that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the display effect performed in a specific game state can be interesting, and it becomes possible to suppress the fall of interest.

[Appendix 34]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is ended is set to a specific gaming state such as a short-time gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is concealed and determined in advance. A gaming machine is disclosed in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is obtained when the number of games played is exhausted (see, for example, JP 2009-240529 A).

  Some of the gaming machines that conceal whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state as described above, are those that perform a highly suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine that conceals whether or not it is highly probable in a specific gaming state and performs a highly suggestive effect that suggests the expectation of high probability in the specific gaming state, If it is not, it is easy to select an effect with a low degree of expectation, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, the player is only given unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is not measured.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to give the display effect performed in a specific game state interesting, and to suppress the fall of an interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result Information about the variable display that is a possible gaming machine that has not been performed yet can be stored as a starting memory by a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and stored by the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory, the identification symbol is changed using the production time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the performance and the stop effect to be performed, and control (for example, short-time gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared to the normal gaming state are executed over a predetermined period. The possible lottery promotion control means and the winning probability in the winning determination are set to a high probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) as compared to the normal gaming state while at least the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. And a concealment period capable of executing a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win determination is the high probability, and in the concealment period, the win in the win determination Index effect execution means (for example, step S370) capable of executing an index effect that can give a sense of expectation that the probability is the high probability; Scenario determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 136)) for determining in advance the scenario of the index effect performed as the overall effect in the concealment period before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed; The symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, determining the number of symbol effect executions in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means at least in the concealment period (for example, Step S324 etc.), and the index effect execution means divides the number of executions of the symbol effect determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into a predetermined unit, regardless of the unit of the start memory. When having special effect determining means for determining that the index effect is performed as an effect performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units. In addition, the scenario determination means sets the scenario of the indicator effect so that when the control for promoting the determination of winning is finished, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the determination of winning is the high probability. It is characterized by determining.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least during the concealment period, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which an identification symbol variation effect and a stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number is determined. In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but at least one or more times for each start memory stored by the hold means at least during the secrecy period. Since the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined, it looks as if variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed, even though the display is variable for one start memory. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Furthermore, since the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit, it is even more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

  In addition, an index effect that can give an expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high is determined as an effect performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units. This index effect is determined in advance before the scenario that is performed as the overall effect in the concealment period is executed before the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed, and when the control for promoting the winning judgment is completed, Whether the probability is high or not is clearly indicated.

  In this way, an indicator effect that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high probability while making the player unaware of the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination is performed. In addition, when the control for accelerating the winning determination is completed, it is clearly indicated by the indicator effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines in which it is disclosed whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high when the concealment period has passed, the end of the concealing period end timing and thus the end of the control that promotes the winning determination It is possible to execute an effect such that it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by deduction of the index effect without making the player aware of the timing. When the index effect is, for example, a game effect between an ally and an enemy, an effect such as high probability confirmation can be realized when the ally wins.

  The “variable display of the identification symbol” here means a series of displays from the start of the variation display of the identification symbol to the stop display with respect to one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of times of variable display is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

  Furthermore, “when the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used using the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed. "Is performed" means not only the time when variable display is performed for one start-up memory but also all or part of the time required for the interval until variable display for the next start-up memory is performed. Therefore, “the design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed” means that the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also included in the case of the last of the variable display. It is a purpose to include.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means is not displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning judgment is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed). As a result, it is possible to give the player an interest in the indicator production that can give a sense of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high, and the winning probability in the winning judgment is high with the return of the indicator presentation. The player can be given an impression that whether or not there is any is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), when the special effect determining means has a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, one of the plurality of start memories is stored. Dividing a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the design effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory as a predetermined unit across a plurality of start memories And a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of start memories without being limited to one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the start memory unit, and it is even more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination. be able to.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the display effect performed in a specific game state can be interesting, and it becomes possible to suppress the fall of interest.

[Appendix 35]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is ended is set to a specific gaming state such as a short-time gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is concealed and determined in advance. A gaming machine is disclosed in which it is disclosed whether or not a high probability is obtained when the number of games played is exhausted (see, for example, JP 2009-240529 A).

  Some of the gaming machines that conceal whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state as described above, are those that perform a highly suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

  However, in a gaming machine that conceals whether or not it is highly probable in a specific gaming state and performs a highly suggestive effect that suggests the expectation of high probability in the specific gaming state, If it is not, it is easy to select an effect with a low degree of expectation, and if such an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, the player is only given unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is not measured.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to give the display effect performed in a specific game state interesting, and to suppress the fall of an interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display, and executes a special game (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result And a lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a short-time gaming state) for promoting the winning determination as compared to a normal gaming state over a predetermined period, and a winning probability in the winning determination. The probability changing means capable of setting a high probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state during at least the control for promoting the winning determination, In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the determination of winning is the high probability, the winning probability in the determination of winning in the concealment period is provided. An index effect execution means capable of executing an index effect (for example, a character subtraction effect) that can be used to estimate whether the probability is high, and a scenario of the index effect that is performed as an overall effect in the concealment period, Scenario determination means for determining in advance before the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed, and the lottery promoting control means has a plurality of times so that the period for executing the control for promoting the winning judgment is different each time. Having a promotion period determining means (for example, step S172, etc.) for determining any one of the periods, and the scenario The determining means clearly indicates whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed according to the period determined by the promotion period determining means. Thus, the scenario of the index effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index effect performed as the overall effect in the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the determination of winning is executed, and the determination of winning is promoted. When the control is finished, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability. Here, the indicator effect is an effect that can be used to infer whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. In addition, since the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is determined to be different each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

  In this way, an indicator effect that makes it possible to guess whether the winning probability in the winning determination is high or not is made not to make the player aware of the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination. In addition, when the control for accelerating the winning determination is completed, it is clearly indicated by the indicator effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines in which it is disclosed whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high when the concealment period has passed, the end of the concealing period end timing and thus the end of the control that promotes the winning determination It is possible to execute an effect such that it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by deduction of the index effect without making the player aware of the timing. When the index effect is, for example, a game effect between an ally and an enemy, an effect such as high probability confirmation can be realized when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as startup memory; With respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means, a design effect execution number determining means (for example, a design effect execution number determining means capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary change) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed) Step S324, etc.) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means Divides the number of symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into a predetermined unit with respect to the start-up memory stored by the holding means. The specific effect determining means for determining a representation embodiment made during the design effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of storage (e.g., step S370, etc.) and having a.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means is determined. . In other words, a symbol effect is performed once for each start memory stored by the holding means, but one or more symbol effects are executed for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is being performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the start memory unit. And the production mode performed during execution of the design production divided into this predetermined unit is determined. Therefore, a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determined start memories for another start memory in which variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one start memory. There may be a case where an effect mode that spans part of the symbol effect is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine an effect mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  “Variable display” means a series of display from the start of the display of the variation of the identification symbol to the stop of the display for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

  Further, the “stop effect” of the identification symbol means that the identification symbol is stopped in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the identification symbol is stopped when one variable display is completed. This is to include both production (for example, this stop).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the game machine further includes a hold effect control means for controlling so that an image related to the start-up memory stored in the hold means is displayed in a predetermined display area. The means controls the image related to the start-up memory stored in the holding means not to be displayed when at least the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of symbol effects to be executed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning judgment is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning judgment is executed). As a result, the player's interest can be given to an indicator effect that can be used to estimate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the display effect performed in a specific game state can be interesting, and it becomes possible to suppress the fall of interest.

[Appendix 36]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, there are known gaming machines that perform winning determination, display a variation of symbols, and stop and display the symbols that are variably displayed. If the game result is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a display effect that makes it possible to expect that a special game may be performed before the result of the win determination is displayed, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, JP, 2006-246964, A).

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the winning determination unit, if it is not a display effect that can be expected to perform a special game, it is changing. There is a possibility that the sense of expectation is lost with respect to the change display of the symbol, and the interest is lowered at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being appropriately aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the variable display that has not been performed yet. Hold means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, jackpot determination random number value, symbol determination random value, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up memory, and the hold When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the start memory next to the one start memory is performed is calculated. Display control means for controlling the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect to be performed, and the identification symbol variation with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. One of the design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the start and stop effects are performed, and the start memory stored by the holding means. Alternatively, a plurality of start memories are determined as effect sections, and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory included in the effect section as a section effect performed in the effect section. ), And the effect mode determining means determines whether or not the section effect is being executed, and when it is determined that the section effect is not being executed, the effect section is determined again. By determining the effect mode of the section effect performed in the effect section, the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or more start memories among the start memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. Since such a section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the effect is a start memory unit effect and to maintain a sense of expectation over a long period of time.

  It should be noted that the aspect in which the section effect is “repeatedly performed without interruption” includes an aspect in which the section effect is performed without interruption as long as there is a reserved start memory. For example, even if the demonstration effect is executed halfway, if the section effect is executed when the start memory is subsequently suspended, it is included in the above “repeatedly performed without interruption”. . In addition, when there are a plurality of start ports (for example, when there are a first start port 5442 and a second start port 440), a game ball enters one of the start ports (for example, the first start port 5442). Includes a mode in which the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption when a game ball enters the other starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), although the segment effect is not performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the effect mode determining means outputs the number of symbol effects of the execution number determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory included in the effect section. Dividing into predetermined units, having section effect mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units regardless of the start-up memory unit It is.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the production mode is determined without being constrained by the start memory unit, it is also possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of startup memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (2), the section effect mode determining means includes a part of the number of symbol effects determined for one start memory included in the effect section and the effect. It is configured to be able to divide a part of the number of executions of symbol effects determined with respect to other start memories included in the section as a predetermined unit across a plurality of start memories.

  According to the gaming machine (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode without being bound by one game result. In addition, since the player can execute the display effect that does not make the player conscious of the variable display in the start memory unit, the range of the effect can be widened, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, regarding the “expectation” described in the above supplementary notes 4 to 8, supplementary note 16 and supplementary note 19, expectation degree with respect to a predetermined internal state (that is, advantageous state) such as a big hit of each notice effect or a high probability gaming state ( (Reliability) is the probability that each notice effect will be executed to be a “big hit” or “high probability gaming state”, and the probability that each notice effect will be executed to be a “big hit” or “high probability game state” It is a numerical value that is divided by the sum of the probability that each notice effect is executed and a predetermined internal state (that is, an unfavorable state) such as “probability” or “low probability gaming state”. However, since the “expected degree” may include a case where the expected degree is 100% and a case where the expected degree is 0%, strictly speaking, there is a case where the above-mentioned division is not established (for example, the production is performed) In this case, it may not be appropriate to divide 1 by 0 since it may include a case where a game state or a win is definitely notified, and in this case, a concept of 100%, 0%, or presence / absence as an expectation is included. Will be.)

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that all inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

16 Liquid crystal display 101 Main CPU
104 Sub SPU

Claims (2)

Lottery means for performing a win determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect image;
Display control means capable of executing control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol and capable of executing control related to the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination;
Sound output control means for controlling so as to output a predetermined effect sound;
A gaming machine comprising
The display control means includes
Specific effect control means for controlling the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the variation effect of the identification symbol as an effect having a predetermined expectation with respect to the result of the winning determination, and the variation of the identification symbol Having an information image display control means for controlling the display means to display an information image related to the gaming machine without displaying an effect;
The sound output control means is
When the specific effect control means does not display the variation effect of the identification symbol, the mute means that does not output the variation sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the information image display control means does not display the variation effect of the identification symbol In some cases, the game machine has a fluctuating sound control means for outputting a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol. The information image display control means includes
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the information image related to the gaming machine is controlled so that a power failure is displayed when the variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed, and a restoration image is displayed when the game is restored thereafter. Machine.